[Docs] [txt|pdf] [Tracker] [WG] [Email] [Diff1] [Diff2] [Nits] [IPR]
Versions: (RFC 3010) 00 01 02 03 04 RFC 3530
NFS Version 4 Working Group S. Shepler
INTERNET-DRAFT Sun Microsystems, Inc.
Document: draft-ietf-nfsv4-rfc3010bis-01.txt C. Beame
Hummingbird Ltd.
B. Callaghan
Sun Microsystems, Inc.
M. Eisler
Zambeel, Inc.
D. Noveck
Network Appliance, Inc.
D. Robinson
Sun Microsystems, Inc.
R. Thurlow
Sun Microsystems, Inc.
July 2002
NFS version 4 Protocol
Status of this Memo
This document is an Internet-Draft and is in full conformance with
all provisions of Section 10 of RFC2026.
Internet-Drafts are working documents of the Internet Engineering
Task Force (IETF), its areas, and its working groups. Note that
other groups may also distribute working documents as Internet-
Drafts.
Internet-Drafts are draft documents valid for a maximum of six months
and may be updated, replaced, or obsoleted by other documents at any
time. It is inappropriate to use Internet- Drafts as reference
material or to cite them other than as "work in progress."
The list of current Internet-Drafts can be accessed at
http://www.ietf.org/ietf/1id-abstracts.txt
The list of Internet-Draft Shadow Directories can be accessed at
http://www.ietf.org/shadow.html.
Abstract
NFS version 4 is a distributed file system protocol which owes
heritage to NFS protocol versions 2 [RFC1094] and 3 [RFC1813].
Expires: December 2002 [Page 1]
Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol July 2002
Unlike earlier versions, the NFS version 4 protocol supports
traditional file access while integrating support for file locking
and the mount protocol. In addition, support for strong security
(and its negotiation), compound operations, client caching, and
internationalization have been added. Of course, attention has been
applied to making NFS version 4 operate well in an Internet
environment.
Copyright
Copyright (C) The Internet Society (2000-2002). All Rights Reserved.
Key Words
The key words "MUST", "MUST NOT", "REQUIRED", "SHALL", "SHALL NOT",
"SHOULD", "SHOULD NOT", "RECOMMENDED", "MAY", and "OPTIONAL" in this
document are to be interpreted as described in RFC 2119.
Expires: December 2002 [Page 2]
Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol July 2002
Table of Contents
1. Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
1.1. Overview of NFS Version 4 Features . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
1.1.1. RPC and Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
1.1.2. Procedure and Operation Structure . . . . . . . . . . . 8
1.1.3. File System Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
1.1.3.1. Filehandle Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
1.1.3.2. Attribute Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
1.1.3.3. File System Replication and Migration . . . . . . . 10
1.1.4. OPEN and CLOSE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
1.1.5. File locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
1.1.6. Client Caching and Delegation . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
1.2. General Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
2. Protocol Data Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
2.1. Basic Data Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
2.2. Structured Data Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
3. RPC and Security Flavor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
3.1. Ports and Transports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
3.2. Security Flavors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
3.2.1. Security mechanisms for NFS version 4 . . . . . . . . 20
3.2.1.1. Kerberos V5 as security triple . . . . . . . . . . . 21
3.2.1.2. LIPKEY as a security triple . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
3.2.1.3. SPKM-3 as a security triple . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
3.3. Security Negotiation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
3.3.1. Security Error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
3.3.2. SECINFO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
3.4. Callback RPC Authentication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
4. Filehandles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
4.1. Obtaining the First Filehandle . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
4.1.1. Root Filehandle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
4.1.2. Public Filehandle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
4.2. Filehandle Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
4.2.1. General Properties of a Filehandle . . . . . . . . . . 27
4.2.2. Persistent Filehandle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
4.2.3. Volatile Filehandle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
4.2.4. One Method of Constructing a Volatile Filehandle . . . 30
4.3. Client Recovery from Filehandle Expiration . . . . . . . 30
5. File Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
5.1. Mandatory Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
5.2. Recommended Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
5.3. Named Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
5.4. Mandatory Attributes - Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . 35
5.5. Recommended Attributes - Definitions . . . . . . . . . . 37
5.6. Interpreting owner and owner_group . . . . . . . . . . . 41
5.7. Character Case Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
5.8. Quota Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
5.9. Access Control Lists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
5.9.1. ACE type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
5.9.2. ACE flag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
5.9.3. ACE Access Mask . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
5.9.4. ACE who . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Expires: December 2002 [Page 3]
Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol July 2002
6. File System Migration and Replication . . . . . . . . . . 49
6.1. Replication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
6.2. Migration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
6.3. Interpretation of the fs_locations Attribute . . . . . . 50
6.4. Filehandle Recovery for Migration or Replication . . . . 51
7. NFS Server Name Space . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
7.1. Server Exports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
7.2. Browsing Exports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
7.3. Server Pseudo File System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
7.4. Multiple Roots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
7.5. Filehandle Volatility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
7.6. Exported Root . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
7.7. Mount Point Crossing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
7.8. Security Policy and Name Space Presentation . . . . . . 54
8. File Locking and Share Reservations . . . . . . . . . . . 55
8.1. Locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
8.1.1. Client ID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
8.1.2. Server Release of Clientid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
8.1.3. nfs_lockowner and stateid Definition . . . . . . . . . 58
8.1.4. Use of the stateid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
8.1.5. Sequencing of Lock Requests . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
8.1.6. Recovery from Replayed Requests . . . . . . . . . . . 61
8.1.7. Releasing nfs_lockowner State . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
8.2. Lock Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
8.3. Blocking Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
8.4. Lease Renewal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
8.5. Crash Recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
8.5.1. Client Failure and Recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
8.5.2. Server Failure and Recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
8.5.3. Network Partitions and Recovery . . . . . . . . . . . 66
8.6. Recovery from a Lock Request Timeout or Abort . . . . . 67
8.7. Server Revocation of Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
8.8. Share Reservations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
8.9. OPEN/CLOSE Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
8.10. Open Upgrade and Downgrade . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
8.11. Short and Long Leases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
8.12. Clocks and Calculating Lease Expiration . . . . . . . . 71
8.13. Migration, Replication and State . . . . . . . . . . . 71
8.13.1. Migration and State . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
8.13.2. Replication and State . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
8.13.3. Notification of Migrated Lease . . . . . . . . . . . 73
9. Client-Side Caching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
9.1. Performance Challenges for Client-Side Caching . . . . . 74
9.2. Delegation and Callbacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
9.2.1. Delegation Recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
9.3. Data Caching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
9.3.1. Data Caching and OPENs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
9.3.2. Data Caching and File Locking . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
9.3.3. Data Caching and Mandatory File Locking . . . . . . . 80
9.3.4. Data Caching and File Identity . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
9.4. Open Delegation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
9.4.1. Open Delegation and Data Caching . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Expires: December 2002 [Page 4]
Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol July 2002
9.4.2. Open Delegation and File Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
9.4.3. Recall of Open Delegation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
9.4.4. Delegation Revocation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
9.5. Data Caching and Revocation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
9.5.1. Revocation Recovery for Write Open Delegation . . . . 88
9.6. Attribute Caching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
9.7. Name Caching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
9.8. Directory Caching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
10. Minor Versioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
11. Internationalization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
11.1. Universal Versus Local Character Sets . . . . . . . . . 96
11.2. Overview of Universal Character Set Standards . . . . . 97
11.3. Difficulties with UCS-4, UCS-2, Unicode . . . . . . . . 98
11.4. UTF-8 and its solutions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
11.5. Normalization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
12. Error Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
13. NFS Version 4 Requests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
13.1. Compound Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
13.2. Evaluation of a Compound Request . . . . . . . . . . . 106
13.3. Synchronous Modifying Operations . . . . . . . . . . . 106
13.4. Operation Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
14. NFS Version 4 Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
14.1. Procedure 0: NULL - No Operation . . . . . . . . . . . 108
14.2. Procedure 1: COMPOUND - Compound Operations . . . . . . 109
14.2.1. Operation 3: ACCESS - Check Access Rights . . . . . . 112
14.2.2. Operation 4: CLOSE - Close File . . . . . . . . . . . 115
14.2.3. Operation 5: COMMIT - Commit Cached Data . . . . . . 117
14.2.4. Operation 6: CREATE - Create a Non-Regular File Object 120
14.2.5. Operation 7: DELEGPURGE - Purge Delegations Awaiting
Recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
14.2.6. Operation 8: DELEGRETURN - Return Delegation . . . . 124
14.2.7. Operation 9: GETATTR - Get Attributes . . . . . . . . 125
14.2.8. Operation 10: GETFH - Get Current Filehandle . . . . 127
14.2.9. Operation 11: LINK - Create Link to a File . . . . . 129
14.2.10. Operation 12: LOCK - Create Lock . . . . . . . . . . 131
14.2.11. Operation 13: LOCKT - Test For Lock . . . . . . . . 134
14.2.12. Operation 14: LOCKU - Unlock File . . . . . . . . . 136
14.2.13. Operation 15: LOOKUP - Lookup Filename . . . . . . . 138
14.2.14. Operation 16: LOOKUPP - Lookup Parent Directory . . 141
14.2.15. Operation 17: NVERIFY - Verify Difference in
Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
14.2.16. Operation 18: OPEN - Open a Regular File . . . . . . 145
14.2.17. Operation 19: OPENATTR - Open Named Attribute
Directory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
14.2.18. Operation 20: OPEN_CONFIRM - Confirm Open . . . . . 156
14.2.19. Operation 21: OPEN_DOWNGRADE - Reduce Open File Access159
14.2.20. Operation 22: PUTFH - Set Current Filehandle . . . . 161
14.2.21. Operation 23: PUTPUBFH - Set Public Filehandle . . . 162
14.2.22. Operation 24: PUTROOTFH - Set Root Filehandle . . . 164
14.2.23. Operation 25: READ - Read from File . . . . . . . . 165
14.2.24. Operation 26: READDIR - Read Directory . . . . . . . 168
14.2.25. Operation 27: READLINK - Read Symbolic Link . . . . 172
Expires: December 2002 [Page 5]
Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol July 2002
14.2.26. Operation 28: REMOVE - Remove Filesystem Object . . 174
14.2.27. Operation 29: RENAME - Rename Directory Entry . . . 176
14.2.28. Operation 30: RENEW - Renew a Lease . . . . . . . . 179
14.2.29. Operation 31: RESTOREFH - Restore Saved Filehandle . 180
14.2.30. Operation 32: SAVEFH - Save Current Filehandle . . . 182
14.2.31. Operation 33: SECINFO - Obtain Available Security . 183
14.2.32. Operation 34: SETATTR - Set Attributes . . . . . . . 186
14.2.33. Operation 35: SETCLIENTID - Negotiate Clientid . . . 189
14.2.34. Operation 36: SETCLIENTID_CONFIRM - Confirm Clientid 191
14.2.35. Operation 37: VERIFY - Verify Same Attributes . . . 192
14.2.36. Operation 38: WRITE - Write to File . . . . . . . . 194
14.2.37. Operation 39: RELEASE_LOCKOWNER - Release Lockowner
State . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
15. NFS Version 4 Callback Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
15.1. Procedure 0: CB_NULL - No Operation . . . . . . . . . . 199
15.2. Procedure 1: CB_COMPOUND - Compound Operations . . . . 200
15.2.1. Operation 3: CB_GETATTR - Get Attributes . . . . . . 202
15.2.2. Operation 4: CB_RECALL - Recall an Open Delegation . 203
16. Security Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
17. IANA Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
17.1. Named Attribute Definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
18. RPC definition file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
19. Bibliography . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238
20. Authors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
20.1. Editor's Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
20.2. Authors' Addresses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
20.3. Acknowledgements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244
21. Full Copyright Statement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
Expires: December 2002 [Page 6]
Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol July 2002
1. Introduction
The NFS version 4 protocol is a further revision of the NFS protocol
defined already by versions 2 [RFC1094] and 3 [RFC1813]. It retains
the essential characteristics of previous versions: design for easy
recovery, independent of transport protocols, operating systems and
filesystems, simplicity, and good performance. The NFS version 4
revision has the following goals:
o Improved access and good performance on the Internet.
The protocol is designed to transit firewalls easily, perform
well where latency is high and bandwidth is low, and scale to
very large numbers of clients per server.
o Strong security with negotiation built into the protocol.
The protocol builds on the work of the ONCRPC working group in
supporting the RPCSEC_GSS protocol. Additionally, the NFS
version 4 protocol provides a mechanism to allow clients and
servers the ability to negotiate security and require clients
and servers to support a minimal set of security schemes.
o Good cross-platform interoperability.
The protocol features a file system model that provides a
useful, common set of features that does not unduly favor one
file system or operating system over another.
o Designed for protocol extensions.
The protocol is designed to accept standard extensions that do
not compromise backward compatibility.
1.1. Overview of NFS Version 4 Features
To provide a reasonable context for the reader, the major features of
NFS version 4 protocol will be reviewed in brief. This will be done
to provide an appropriate context for both the reader who is familiar
with the previous versions of the NFS protocol and the reader that is
new to the NFS protocols. For the reader new to the NFS protocols,
there is still a fundamental knowledge that is expected. The reader
should be familiar with the XDR and RPC protocols as described in
[RFC1831] and [RFC1832]. A basic knowledge of file systems and
distributed file systems is expected as well.
Expires: December 2002 [Page 7]
Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol July 2002
1.1.1. RPC and Security
As with previous versions of NFS, the External Data Representation
(XDR) and Remote Procedure Call (RPC) mechanisms used for the NFS
version 4 protocol are those defined in [RFC1831] and [RFC1832]. To
meet end to end security requirements, the RPCSEC_GSS framework
[RFC2203] will be used to extend the basic RPC security. With the
use of RPCSEC_GSS, various mechanisms can be provided to offer
authentication, integrity, and privacy to the NFS version 4 protocol.
Kerberos V5 will be used as described in [RFC1964] to provide one
security framework. The LIPKEY GSS-API mechanism described in
[RFC2847] will be used to provide for the use of user password and
server public key by the NFS version 4 protocol. With the use of
RPCSEC_GSS, other mechanisms may also be specified and used for NFS
version 4 security.
To enable in-band security negotiation, the NFS version 4 protocol
has added a new operation which provides the client a method of
querying the server about its policies regarding which security
mechanisms must be used for access to the server's file system
resources. With this, the client can securely match the security
mechanism that meets the policies specified at both the client and
server.
1.1.2. Procedure and Operation Structure
A significant departure from the previous versions of the NFS
protocol is the introduction of the COMPOUND procedure. For the NFS
version 4 protocol, there are two RPC procedures, NULL and COMPOUND.
The COMPOUND procedure is defined in terms of operations and these
operations correspond more closely to the traditional NFS procedures.
With the use of the COMPOUND procedure, the client is able to build
simple or complex requests. These COMPOUND requests allow for a
reduction in the number of RPCs needed for logical file system
operations. For example, without previous contact with a server a
client will be able to read data from a file in one request by
combining LOOKUP, OPEN, and READ operations in a single COMPOUND RPC.
With previous versions of the NFS protocol, this type of single
request was not possible.
The model used for COMPOUND is very simple. There is no logical OR
or ANDing of operations. The operations combined within a COMPOUND
request are evaluated in order by the server. Once an operation
returns a failing result, the evaluation ends and the results of all
evaluated operations are returned to the client.
The NFS version 4 protocol continues to have the client refer to a
file or directory at the server by a "filehandle". The COMPOUND
procedure has a method of passing a filehandle from one operation to
another within the sequence of operations. There is a concept of a
"current filehandle" and "saved filehandle". Most operations use the
Expires: December 2002 [Page 8]
Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol July 2002
"current filehandle" as the file system object to operate upon. The
"saved filehandle" is used as temporary filehandle storage within a
COMPOUND procedure as well as an additional operand for certain
operations.
1.1.3. File System Model
The general file system model used for the NFS version 4 protocol is
the same as previous versions. The server file system is
hierarchical with the regular files contained within being treated as
opaque byte streams. In a slight departure, file and directory names
are encoded with UTF-8 to deal with the basics of
internationalization.
The NFS version 4 protocol does not require a separate protocol to
provide for the initial mapping between path name and filehandle.
Instead of using the older MOUNT protocol for this mapping, the
server provides a ROOT filehandle that represents the logical root or
top of the file system tree provided by the server. The server
provides multiple file systems by glueing them together with pseudo
file systems. These pseudo file systems provide for potential gaps
in the path names between real file systems.
1.1.3.1. Filehandle Types
In previous versions of the NFS protocol, the filehandle provided by
the server was guaranteed to be valid or persistent for the lifetime
of the file system object to which it referred. For some server
implementations, this persistence requirement has been difficult to
meet. For the NFS version 4 protocol, this requirement has been
relaxed by introducing another type of filehandle, volatile. With
persistent and volatile filehandle types, the server implementation
can match the abilities of the file system at the server along with
the operating environment. The client will have knowledge of the
type of filehandle being provided by the server and can be prepared
to deal with the semantics of each.
1.1.3.2. Attribute Types
The NFS version 4 protocol introduces three classes of file system or
file attributes. Like the additional filehandle type, the
classification of file attributes has been done to ease server
implementations along with extending the overall functionality of the
NFS protocol. This attribute model is structured to be extensible
such that new attributes can be introduced in minor revisions of the
protocol without requiring significant rework.
The three classifications are: mandatory, recommended and named
attributes. This is a significant departure from the previous
Expires: December 2002 [Page 9]
Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol July 2002
attribute model used in the NFS protocol. Previously, the attributes
for the file system and file objects were a fixed set of mainly Unix
attributes. If the server or client did not support a particular
attribute, it would have to simulate the attribute the best it could.
Mandatory attributes are the minimal set of file or file system
attributes that must be provided by the server and must be properly
represented by the server. Recommended attributes represent
different file system types and operating environments. The
recommended attributes will allow for better interoperability and the
inclusion of more operating environments. The mandatory and
recommended attribute sets are traditional file or file system
attributes. The third type of attribute is the named attribute. A
named attribute is an opaque byte stream that is associated with a
directory or file and referred to by a string name. Named attributes
are meant to be used by client applications as a method to associate
application specific data with a regular file or directory.
One significant addition to the recommended set of file attributes is
the Access Control List (ACL) attribute. This attribute provides for
directory and file access control beyond the model used in previous
versions of the NFS protocol. The ACL definition allows for
specification of user and group level access control.
1.1.3.3. File System Replication and Migration
With the use of a special file attribute, the ability to migrate or
replicate server file systems is enabled within the protocol. The
file system locations attribute provides a method for the client to
probe the server about the location of a file system. In the event
of a migration of a file system, the client will receive an error
when operating on the file system and it can then query as to the new
file system location. Similar steps are used for replication, the
client is able to query the server for the multiple available
locations of a particular file system. From this information, the
client can use its own policies to access the appropriate file system
location.
1.1.4. OPEN and CLOSE
The NFS version 4 protocol introduces OPEN and CLOSE operations. The
OPEN operation provides a single point where file lookup, creation,
and share semantics can be combined. The CLOSE operation also
provides for the release of state accumulated by OPEN.
1.1.5. File locking
With the NFS version 4 protocol, the support for byte range file
locking is part of the NFS protocol. The file locking support is
Expires: December 2002 [Page 10]
Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol July 2002
structured so that an RPC callback mechanism is not required. This
is a departure from the previous versions of the NFS file locking
protocol, Network Lock Manager (NLM). The state associated with file
locks is maintained at the server under a lease-based model. The
server defines a single lease period for all state held by a NFS
client. If the client does not renew its lease within the defined
period, all state associated with the client's lease may be released
by the server. The client may renew its lease with use of the RENEW
operation or implicitly by use of other operations (primarily READ).
1.1.6. Client Caching and Delegation
The file, attribute, and directory caching for the NFS version 4
protocol is similar to previous versions. Attributes and directory
information are cached for a duration determined by the client. At
the end of a predefined timeout, the client will query the server to
see if the related file system object has been updated.
For file data, the client checks its cache validity when the file is
opened. A query is sent to the server to determine if the file has
been changed. Based on this information, the client determines if
the data cache for the file should kept or released. Also, when the
file is closed, any modified data is written to the server.
If an application wants to serialize access to file data, file
locking of the file data ranges in question should be used.
The major addition to NFS version 4 in the area of caching is the
ability of the server to delegate certain responsibilities to the
client. When the server grants a delegation for a file to a client,
the client is guaranteed certain semantics with respect to the
sharing of that file with other clients. At OPEN, the server may
provide the client either a read or write delegation for the file.
If the client is granted a read delegation, it is assured that no
other client has the ability to write to the file for the duration of
the delegation. If the client is granted a write delegation, the
client is assured that no other client has read or write access to
the file.
Delegations can be recalled by the server. If another client
requests access to the file in such a way that the access conflicts
with the granted delegation, the server is able to notify the initial
client and recall the delegation. This requires that a callback path
exist between the server and client. If this callback path does not
exist, then delegations can not be granted. The essence of a
delegation is that it allows the client to locally service operations
such as OPEN, CLOSE, LOCK, LOCKU, READ, WRITE without immediate
interaction with the server.
Expires: December 2002 [Page 11]
Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol July 2002
1.2. General Definitions
The following definitions are provided for the purpose of providing
an appropriate context for the reader.
Client The "client" is the entity that accesses the NFS server's
resources. The client may be an application which contains
the logic to access the NFS server directly. The client
may also be the traditional operating system client remote
file system services for a set of applications.
In the case of file locking the client is the entity that
maintains a set of locks on behalf of one or more
applications. This client is responsible for crash or
failure recovery for those locks it manages.
Note that multiple clients may share the same transport and
multiple clients may exist on the same network node.
Clientid A 64-bit quantity used as a unique, short-hand reference to
a client supplied Verifier and ID. The server is
responsible for supplying the Clientid.
Lease An interval of time defined by the server for which the
client is irrevocably granted a lock. At the end of a
lease period the lock may be revoked if the lease has not
been extended. The lock must be revoked if a conflicting
lock has been granted after the lease interval.
All leases granted by a server have the same fixed
interval. Note that the fixed interval was chosen to
alleviate the expense a server would have in maintaining
state about variable length leases across server failures.
Lock The term "lock" is used to refer to both record (byte-
range) locks as well as file (share) locks unless
specifically stated otherwise.
Server The "Server" is the entity responsible for coordinating
client access to a set of file systems.
Stable Storage
NFS version 4 servers must be able to recover without data
loss from multiple power failures (including cascading
power failures, that is, several power failures in quick
succession), operating system failures, and hardware
failure of components other than the storage medium itself
(for example, disk, nonvolatile RAM).
Some examples of stable storage that are allowable for an
NFS server include:
Expires: December 2002 [Page 12]
Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol July 2002
1. Media commit of data, that is, the modified data has
been successfully written to the disk media,
for example, the disk platter.
2. An immediate reply disk drive with battery-backed
on-drive intermediate storage or uninterruptible power
system (UPS).
3. Server commit of data with battery-backed intermediate
storage and recovery software.
4. Cache commit with uninterruptible power system (UPS)
and recovery software.
Stateid A 128-bit quantity returned by a server that uniquely
defines the open and locking state provided by the server
for a specific open or lock owner for a specific file.
Stateids composed of all bits 0 or all bits 1 have special
meaning and are reserved values.
Verifier A 64-bit quantity generated by the client that the server
can use to determine if the client has restarted and lost
all previous lock state.
Expires: December 2002 [Page 13]
Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol July 2002
2. Protocol Data Types
The syntax and semantics to describe the data types of the NFS
version 4 protocol are defined in the XDR [RFC1832] and RPC [RFC1831]
documents. The next sections build upon the XDR data types to define
types and structures specific to this protocol.
2.1. Basic Data Types
Data Type Definition
_____________________________________________________________________
int32_t typedef int int32_t;
uint32_t typedef unsigned int uint32_t;
int64_t typedef hyper int64_t;
uint64_t typedef unsigned hyper uint64_t;
attrlist4 typedef opaque attrlist4<>;
Used for file/directory attributes
bitmap4 typedef uint32_t bitmap4<>;
Used in attribute array encoding.
changeid4 typedef uint64_t changeid4;
Used in definition of change_info
clientid4 typedef uint64_t clientid4;
Shorthand reference to client identification
component4 typedef utf8string component4;
Represents path name components
count4 typedef uint32_t count4;
Various count parameters (READ, WRITE, COMMIT)
length4 typedef uint64_t length4;
Describes LOCK lengths
linktext4 typedef utf8string linktext4;
Symbolic link contents
mode4 typedef uint32_t mode4;
Mode attribute data type
nfs_cookie4 typedef uint64_t nfs_cookie4;
Opaque cookie value for READDIR
nfs_fh4 typedef opaque nfs_fh4<NFS4_FHSIZE>;
Filehandle definition; NFS4_FHSIZE is defined as 128
Expires: December 2002 [Page 14]
Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol July 2002
nfs_ftype4 enum nfs_ftype4;
Various defined file types
nfsstat4 enum nfsstat4;
Return value for operations
offset4 typedef uint64_t offset4;
Various offset designations (READ, WRITE, LOCK, COMMIT)
pathname4 typedef component4 pathname4<>;
Represents path name for LOOKUP, OPEN and others
qop4 typedef uint32_t qop4;
Quality of protection designation in SECINFO
sec_oid4 typedef opaque sec_oid4<>;
Security Object Identifier
The sec_oid4 data type is not really opaque.
Instead contains an ASN.1 OBJECT IDENTIFIER as used
by GSS-API in the mech_type argument to
GSS_Init_sec_context. See [RFC2078] for details.
seqid4 typedef uint32_t seqid4;
Sequence identifier used for file locking
utf8string typedef opaque utf8string<>;
UTF-8 encoding for strings
verifier4 typedef opaque verifier4[NFS4_VERIFIER_SIZE];
Verifier used for various operations (COMMIT, CREATE,
OPEN, READDIR, SETCLIENTID, WRITE)
NFS4_VERIFIER_SIZE is defined as 8
2.2. Structured Data Types
nfstime4
struct nfstime4 {
int64_t seconds;
uint32_t nseconds;
}
The nfstime4 structure gives the number of seconds and
nanoseconds since midnight or 0 hour January 1, 1970 Coordinated
Universal Time (UTC). Values greater than zero for the seconds
field denote dates after the 0 hour January 1, 1970. Values
less than zero for the seconds field denote dates before the 0
hour January 1, 1970. In both cases, the nseconds field is to
be added to the seconds field for the final time representation.
For example, if the time to be represented is one-half second
before 0 hour January 1, 1970, the seconds field would have a
Expires: December 2002 [Page 15]
Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol July 2002
value of negative one (-1) and the nseconds fields would have a
value of one-half second (500000000). Values greater than
999,999,999 for nseconds are considered invalid.
This data type is used to pass time and date information. A
server converts to and from its local representation of time
when processing time values, preserving as much accuracy as
possible. If the precision of timestamps stored for a file
system object is less than defined, loss of precision can occur.
An adjunct time maintenance protocol is recommended to reduce
client and server time skew.
time_how4
enum time_how4 {
SET_TO_SERVER_TIME4 = 0,
SET_TO_CLIENT_TIME4 = 1
};
settime4
union settime4 switch (time_how4 set_it) {
case SET_TO_CLIENT_TIME4:
nfstime4 time;
default:
void;
};
The above definitions are used as the attribute definitions to
set time values. If set_it is SET_TO_SERVER_TIME4, then the
server uses its local representation of time for the time value.
specdata4
struct specdata4 {
uint32_t specdata1;
uint32_t specdata2;
};
This data type represents additional information for the device
file types NF4CHR and NF4BLK.
fsid4
struct fsid4 {
uint64_t major;
uint64_t minor;
};
Expires: December 2002 [Page 16]
Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol July 2002
This type is the file system identifier that is used as a
mandatory attribute.
fs_location4
struct fs_location4 {
utf8string server<>;
pathname4 rootpath;
};
fs_locations4
struct fs_locations4 {
pathname4 fs_root;
fs_location4 locations<>;
};
The fs_location4 and fs_locations4 data types are used for the
fs_locations recommended attribute which is used for migration
and replication support.
fattr4
struct fattr4 {
bitmap4 attrmask;
attrlist4 attr_vals;
};
The fattr4 structure is used to represent file and directory
attributes.
The bitmap is a counted array of 32 bit integers used to contain
bit values. The position of the integer in the array that
contains bit n can be computed from the expression (n / 32) and
its bit within that integer is (n mod 32).
0 1
+-----------+-----------+-----------+--
| count | 31 .. 0 | 63 .. 32 |
+-----------+-----------+-----------+--
change_info4
struct change_info4 {
bool atomic;
changeid4 before;
changeid4 after;
};
Expires: December 2002 [Page 17]
Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol July 2002
This structure is used with the CREATE, LINK, REMOVE, RENAME
operations to let the client know the value of the change
attribute for the directory in which the target file system
object resides.
clientaddr4
struct clientaddr4 {
/* see struct rpcb in RFC 1833 */
string r_netid<>; /* network id */
string r_addr<>; /* universal address */
};
The clientaddr4 structure is used as part of the SETCLIENT
operation to either specify the address of the client that is
using a clientid or as part of the call back registration.
cb_client4
struct cb_client4 {
unsigned int cb_program;
clientaddr4 cb_location;
};
This structure is used by the client to inform the server of its
call back address; includes the program number and client
address.
nfs_client_id4
struct nfs_client_id4 {
verifier4 verifier;
opaque id<NFS4_OPAQUE_LIMIT>;
};
This structure is part of the arguments to the SETCLIENTID
operation. NFS4_OPAQUE_LIMIT is defined as 1024.
open_owner4
struct open_owner4 {
clientid4 clientid;
opaque owner<NFS4_OPAQUE_LIMIT>;
};
This structure is used to identify the owner of open state.
NFS4_OPAQUE_LIMIT is defined as 1024.
Expires: December 2002 [Page 18]
Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol July 2002
lock_owner4
struct nfs_lockowner4 {
clientid4 clientid;
opaque owner<NFS4_OPAQUE_LIMIT>;
};
This structure is used to identify the owner of file locking
state. NFS4_OPAQUE_LIMIT is defined as 1024.
stateid4
struct stateid4 {
uint32_t seqid;
opaque other[12];
};
This strucutre is used for the various state sharing mechanisms
between the client and server. For the client, this data
structure is read-only. The seqid value is the only field that
the client should interpret. See the section for the OPEN
operation for further description of how the seqid field is to
be interpreted.
Expires: December 2002 [Page 19]
Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol July 2002
3. RPC and Security Flavor
The NFS version 4 protocol is a Remote Procedure Call (RPC)
application that uses RPC version 2 and the corresponding eXternal
Data Representation (XDR) as defined in [RFC1831] and [RFC1832]. The
RPCSEC_GSS security flavor as defined in [RFC2203] MUST be used as
the mechanism to deliver stronger security for the NFS version 4
protocol.
3.1. Ports and Transports
Historically, NFS version 2 and version 3 servers have resided on
port 2049. The registered port 2049 [RFC1700] for the NFS protocol
should be the default configuration. Using the registered port for
NFS services means the NFS client will not need to use the RPC
binding protocols as described in [RFC1833]; this will allow NFS to
transit firewalls.
The transport used by the RPC service for the NFS version 4 protocol
MUST provide congestion control comparable to that defined for TCP in
[RFC2581]. If the operating environment implements TCP, the NFS
version 4 protocol SHOULD be supported over TCP. The NFS client and
server may use other transports if they support congestion control as
defined above and in those cases a mechanism may be provided to
override TCP usage in favor of another transport.
If TCP is used as the transport, the client and server SHOULD use
persistent connections. This will prevent the weakening of TCP's
congestion control via short lived connections and will improve
performance for the WAN environment by eliminating the need for SYN
handshakes.
Note that for various timers, the client and server should avoid
inadvertent synchronization of those timers. For further discussion
of the general issue refer to [Floyd].
3.2. Security Flavors
Traditional RPC implementations have included AUTH_NONE, AUTH_SYS,
AUTH_DH, and AUTH_KRB4 as security flavors. With [RFC2203] an
additional security flavor of RPCSEC_GSS has been introduced which
uses the functionality of GSS-API [RFC2078]. This allows for the use
of varying security mechanisms by the RPC layer without the
additional implementation overhead of adding RPC security flavors.
For NFS version 4, the RPCSEC_GSS security flavor MUST be used to
enable the mandatory security mechanism. Other flavors, such as,
AUTH_NONE, AUTH_SYS, and AUTH_DH MAY be implemented as well.
3.2.1. Security mechanisms for NFS version 4
The use of RPCSEC_GSS requires selection of: mechanism, quality of
Expires: December 2002 [Page 20]
Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol July 2002
protection, and service (authentication, integrity, privacy). The
remainder of this document will refer to these three parameters of
the RPCSEC_GSS security as the security triple.
3.2.1.1. Kerberos V5 as security triple
The Kerberos V5 GSS-API mechanism as described in [RFC1964] MUST be
implemented and provide the following security triples.
column descriptions:
1 == number of pseudo flavor
2 == name of pseudo flavor
3 == mechanism's OID
4 == mechanism's algorithm(s)
5 == RPCSEC_GSS service
1 2 3 4 5
-----------------------------------------------------------------------
390003 krb5 1.2.840.113554.1.2.2 DES MAC MD5 rpc_gss_svc_none
390004 krb5i 1.2.840.113554.1.2.2 DES MAC MD5 rpc_gss_svc_integrity
390005 krb5p 1.2.840.113554.1.2.2 DES MAC MD5 rpc_gss_svc_privacy
for integrity,
and 56 bit DES
for privacy.
Note that the pseudo flavor is presented here as a mapping aid to the
implementor. Because this NFS protocol includes a method to
negotiate security and it understands the GSS-API mechanism, the
pseudo flavor is not needed. The pseudo flavor is needed for NFS
version 3 since the security negotiation is done via the MOUNT
protocol.
For a discussion of NFS' use of RPCSEC_GSS and Kerberos V5, please
see [RFC2623].
3.2.1.2. LIPKEY as a security triple
The LIPKEY GSS-API mechanism as described in [RFC2847] MUST be
implemented and provide the following security triples. The
definition of the columns matches the previous subsection "Kerberos
V5 as security triple"
1 2 3 4 5
-----------------------------------------------------------------------
390006 lipkey 1.3.6.1.5.5.9 negotiated rpc_gss_svc_none
390007 lipkey-i 1.3.6.1.5.5.9 negotiated rpc_gss_svc_integrity
390008 lipkey-p 1.3.6.1.5.5.9 negotiated rpc_gss_svc_privacy
The mechanism algorithm is listed as "negotiated". This is because
LIPKEY is layered on SPKM-3 and in SPKM-3 [RFC2847] the
Expires: December 2002 [Page 21]
Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol July 2002
confidentiality and integrity algorithms are negotiated. Since
SPKM-3 specifies HMAC-MD5 for integrity as MANDATORY, 128 bit
cast5CBC for confidentiality for privacy as MANDATORY, and further
specifies that HMAC-MD5 and cast5CBC MUST be listed first before
weaker algorithms, specifying "negotiated" in column 4 does not
impair interoperability. In the event an SPKM-3 peer does not
support the mandatory algorithms, the other peer is free to accept or
reject the GSS-API context creation.
Because SPKM-3 negotiates the algorithms, subsequent calls to
LIPKEY's GSS_Wrap() and GSS_GetMIC() by RPCSEC_GSS will use a quality
of protection value of 0 (zero). See section 5.2 of [RFC2025] for an
explanation.
LIPKEY uses SPKM-3 to create a secure channel in which to pass a user
name and password from the client to the server. Once the user name
and password have been accepted by the server, calls to the LIPKEY
context are redirected to the SPKM-3 context. See [RFC2847] for more
details.
3.2.1.3. SPKM-3 as a security triple
The SPKM-3 GSS-API mechanism as described in [RFC2847] MUST be
implemented and provide the following security triples. The
definition of the columns matches the previous subsection "Kerberos
V5 as security triple".
1 2 3 4 5
-----------------------------------------------------------------------
390009 spkm3 1.3.6.1.5.5.1.3 negotiated rpc_gss_svc_none
390010 spkm3i 1.3.6.1.5.5.1.3 negotiated rpc_gss_svc_integrity
390011 spkm3p 1.3.6.1.5.5.1.3 negotiated rpc_gss_svc_privacy
For a discussion as to why the mechanism algorithm is listed as
"negotiated", see the previous section "LIPKEY as a security triple."
Because SPKM-3 negotiates the algorithms, subsequent calls to SPKM-
3's GSS_Wrap() and GSS_GetMIC() by RPCSEC_GSS will use a quality of
protection value of 0 (zero). See section 5.2 of [RFC2025] for an
explanation.
Even though LIPKEY is layered over SPKM-3, SPKM-3 is specified as a
mandatory set of triples to handle the situations where the initiator
(the client) is anonymous or where the initiator has its own
certificate. If the initiator is anonymous, there will not be a user
name and password to send to the target (the server). If the
initiator has its own certificate, then using passwords is
superfluous.
Expires: December 2002 [Page 22]
Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol July 2002
3.3. Security Negotiation
With the NFS version 4 server potentially offering multiple security
mechanisms, the client needs a method to determine or negotiate which
mechanism is to be used for its communication with the server. The
NFS server may have multiple points within its file system name space
that are available for use by NFS clients. In turn the NFS server
may be configured such that each of these entry points may have
different or multiple security mechanisms in use.
The security negotiation between client and server must be done with
a secure channel to eliminate the possibility of a third party
intercepting the negotiation sequence and forcing the client and
server to choose a lower level of security than required or desired.
3.3.1. Security Error
Based on the assumption that each NFS version 4 client and server
must support a minimum set of security (i.e. LIPKEY, SPKM-3, and
Kerberos-V5 all under RPCSEC_GSS), the NFS client will start its
communication with the server with one of the minimal security
triples. During communication with the server, the client may
receive an NFS error of NFS4ERR_WRONGSEC. This error allows the
server to notify the client that the security triple currently being
used is not appropriate for access to the server's file system
resources. The client is then responsible for determining what
security triples are available at the server and choose one which is
appropriate for the client.
3.3.2. SECINFO
The new SECINFO operation will allow the client to determine, on a
per filehandle basis, what security triple is to be used for server
access. In general, the client will not have to use the SECINFO
procedure except during initial communication with the server or when
the client crosses policy boundaries at the server. It is possible
that the server's policies change during the client's interaction
therefore forcing the client to negotiate a new security triple.
3.4. Callback RPC Authentication
The callback RPC (described later) must mutually authenticate the NFS
server to the principal that acquired the clientid (also described
later), using the same security flavor the original SETCLIENTID
operation used. Because LIPKEY is layered over SPKM-3, it is
permissible for the server to use SPKM-3 and not LIPKEY for the
callback even if the client used LIPKEY for SETCLIENTID.
For AUTH_NONE, there are no principals, so this is a non-issue.
Expires: December 2002 [Page 23]
Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol July 2002
For AUTH_SYS, the server simply uses the AUTH_SYS credential that the
user used when it set up the delegation.
For AUTH_DH, one commonly used convention is that the server uses the
credential corresponding to this AUTH_DH principal:
unix.host@domain
where host and domain are variables corresponding to the name of
server host and directory services domain in which it lives such as a
Network Information System domain or a DNS domain.
Regardless of what security mechanism under RPCSEC_GSS is being used,
the NFS server, MUST identify itself in GSS-API via a
GSS_C_NT_HOSTBASED_SERVICE name type. GSS_C_NT_HOSTBASED_SERVICE
names are of the form:
service@hostname
For NFS, the "service" element is
nfs
Implementations of security mechanisms will convert nfs@hostname to
various different forms. For Kerberos V5 and LIPKEY, the following
form is RECOMMENDED:
nfs/hostname
For Kerberos V5, nfs/hostname would be a server principal in the
Kerberos Key Distribution Center database. For LIPKEY, this would be
the username passed to the target (the NFS version 4 client that
receives the callback).
It should be noted that LIPKEY may not work for callbacks, since the
LIPKEY client uses a user id/password. If the NFS client receiving
the callback can authenticate the NFS server's user name/password
pair, and if the user that the NFS server is authenticating to has a
public key certificate, then it works.
In situations where NFS client uses LIPKEY and uses a per-host
principal for the SETCLIENTID operation, instead of using LIPKEY for
SETCLIENTID, it is RECOMMENDED that SPKM-3 with mutual authentication
be used. This effectively means that the client will use a
certificate to authenticate and identify the initiator to the target
on the NFS server. Using SPKM-3 and not LIPKEY has the following
advantages:
o When the server does a callback, it must authenticate to the
principal used in the SETCLIENTID. Even if LIPKEY is used,
because LIPKEY is layered over SPKM-3, the NFS client will need
to have a certificate that corresponds to the principal used in
Expires: December 2002 [Page 24]
Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol July 2002
the SETCLIENTID operation. From an administrative perspective,
having a user name, password, and certificate for both the
client and server is redundant.
o LIPKEY was intended to minimize additional infrastructure
requirements beyond a certificate for the target, and the
expectation is that existing password infrastructure can be
leveraged for the initiator. In some environments, a per-host
password does not exist yet. If certificates are used for any
per-host principals, then additional password infrastructure is
not needed.
o In cases when a host is both an NFS client and server, it can
share the same per-host certificate.
Expires: December 2002 [Page 25]
Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol July 2002
4. Filehandles
The filehandle in the NFS protocol is a per server unique identifier
for a file system object. The contents of the filehandle are opaque
to the client. Therefore, the server is responsible for translating
the filehandle to an internal representation of the file system
object. Since the filehandle is the client's reference to an object
and the client may cache this reference, the server SHOULD not reuse
a filehandle for another file system object. If the server needs to
reuse a filehandle value, the time elapsed before reuse SHOULD be
large enough such that it is unlikely the client has a cached copy of
the reused filehandle value. Note that a client may cache a
filehandle for a very long time. For example, a client may cache NFS
data to local storage as a method to expand its effective cache size
and as a means to survive client restarts. Therefore, the lifetime
of a cached filehandle may be extended.
4.1. Obtaining the First Filehandle
The operations of the NFS protocol are defined in terms of one or
more filehandles. Therefore, the client needs a filehandle to
initiate communication with the server. With the NFS version 2
protocol [RFC1094] and the NFS version 3 protocol [RFC1813], there
exists an ancillary protocol to obtain this first filehandle. The
MOUNT protocol, RPC program number 100005, provides the mechanism of
translating a string based file system path name to a filehandle
which can then be used by the NFS protocols.
The MOUNT protocol has deficiencies in the area of security and use
via firewalls. This is one reason that the use of the public
filehandle was introduced in [RFC2054] and [RFC2055]. With the use
of the public filehandle in combination with the LOOKUP procedure in
the NFS version 2 and 3 protocols, it has been demonstrated that the
MOUNT protocol is unnecessary for viable interaction between NFS
client and server.
Therefore, the NFS version 4 protocol will not use an ancillary
protocol for translation from string based path names to a
filehandle. Two special filehandles will be used as starting points
for the NFS client.
4.1.1. Root Filehandle
The first of the special filehandles is the ROOT filehandle. The
ROOT filehandle is the "conceptual" root of the file system name
space at the NFS server. The client uses or starts with the ROOT
filehandle by employing the PUTROOTFH operation. The PUTROOTFH
operation instructs the server to set the "current" filehandle to the
ROOT of the server's file tree. Once this PUTROOTFH operation is
used, the client can then traverse the entirety of the server's file
Expires: December 2002 [Page 26]
Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol July 2002
tree with the LOOKUP procedure. A complete discussion of the server
name space is in the section "NFS Server Name Space".
4.1.2. Public Filehandle
The second special filehandle is the PUBLIC filehandle. Unlike the
ROOT filehandle, the PUBLIC filehandle may be bound or represent an
arbitrary file system object at the server. The server is
responsible for this binding. It may be that the PUBLIC filehandle
and the ROOT filehandle refer to the same file system object.
However, it is up to the administrative software at the server and
the policies of the server administrator to define the binding of the
PUBLIC filehandle and server file system object. The client may not
make any assumptions about this binding.
4.2. Filehandle Types
In the NFS version 2 and 3 protocols, there was one type of
filehandle with a single set of semantics. The NFS version 4
protocol introduces a new type of filehandle in an attempt to
accommodate certain server environments. The first type of
filehandle is 'persistent'. The semantics of a persistent filehandle
are the same as the filehandles of the NFS version 2 and 3 protocols.
The second or new type of filehandle is the "volatile" filehandle.
The volatile filehandle type is being introduced to address server
functionality or implementation issues which make correct
implementation of a persistent filehandle infeasible. Some server
environments do not provide a file system level invariant that can be
used to construct a persistent filehandle. The underlying server
file system may not provide the invariant or the server's file system
programming interfaces may not provide access to the needed
invariant. Volatile filehandles may ease the implementation of
server functionality such as hierarchical storage management or file
system reorganization or migration. However, the volatile filehandle
increases the implementation burden for the client. However this
increased burden is deemed acceptable based on the overall gains
achieved by the protocol.
Since the client will need to handle persistent and volatile
filehandle differently, a file attribute is defined which may be used
by the client to determine the filehandle types being returned by the
server.
4.2.1. General Properties of a Filehandle
The filehandle contains all the information the server needs to
distinguish an individual file. To the client, the filehandle is
opaque. The client stores filehandles for use in a later request and
Expires: December 2002 [Page 27]
Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol July 2002
can compare two filehandles from the same server for equality by
doing a byte-by-byte comparison. However, the client MUST NOT
otherwise interpret the contents of filehandles. If two filehandles
from the same server are equal, they MUST refer to the same file. If
they are not equal, the client may use information provided by the
server, in the form of file attributes, to determine whether they
denote the same files or different files. The client would do this
as necessary for client side caching. Servers SHOULD try to maintain
a one-to-one correspondence between filehandles and files but this is
not required. Clients MUST use filehandle comparisons only to
improve performance, not for correct behavior. All clients need to
be prepared for situations in which it cannot be determined whether
two filehandles denote the same object and in such cases, avoid
making invalid assumpions which might cause incorrect behavior.
Further discussion of filehandle and attribute comparison in the
context of data caching is presented in the section "Data Caching and
File Identity".
As an example, in the case that two different path names when
traversed at the server terminate at the same file system object, the
server SHOULD return the same filehandle for each path. This can
occur if a hard link is used to create two file names which refer to
the same underlying file object and associated data. For example, if
paths /a/b/c and /a/d/c refer to the same file, the server SHOULD
return the same filehandle for both path names traversals.
4.2.2. Persistent Filehandle
A persistent filehandle is defined as having a fixed value for the
lifetime of the file system object to which it refers. Once the
server creates the filehandle for a file system object, the server
MUST accept the same filehandle for the object for the lifetime of
the object. If the server restarts or reboots the NFS server must
honor the same filehandle value as it did in the server's previous
instantiation. Similarly, if the file system is migrated, the new
NFS server must honor the same file handle as the old NFS server.
The persistent filehandle will be become stale or invalid when the
file system object is removed. When the server is presented with a
persistent filehandle that refers to a deleted object, it MUST return
an error of NFS4ERR_STALE. A filehandle may become stale when the
file system containing the object is no longer available. The file
system may become unavailable if it exists on removable media and the
media is no longer available at the server or the file system in
whole has been destroyed or the file system has simply been removed
from the server's name space (i.e. unmounted in a Unix environment).
4.2.3. Volatile Filehandle
A volatile filehandle does not share the same longevity
Expires: December 2002 [Page 28]
Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol July 2002
characteristics of a persistent filehandle. The server may determine
that a volatile filehandle is no longer valid at many different
points in time. If the server can definitively determine that a
volatile filehandle refers to an object that has been removed, the
server should return NFS4ERR_STALE to the client (as is the case for
persistent filehandles). In all other cases where the server
determines that a volatile filehandle can no longer be used, it
should return an error of NFS4ERR_FHEXPIRED.
The mandatory attribute "fh_expire_type" is used by the client to
determine what type of filehandle the server is providing for a
particular file system. This attribute is a bitmask with the
following values:
FH4_PERSISTENT
The value of FH4_PERSISTENT is used to indicate a persistent
filehandle, which is valid until the object is removed from the
file system. The server will not return NFS4ERR_FHEXPIRED for
this filehandle. FH4_PERSISTENT is defined as a value in which
none of the bits specified below are set.
FH4_NOEXPIRE_WITH_OPEN
The filehandle will not expire while client has the file open.
If this bit is set, then the values FH4_VOLATILE_ANY or
FH4_VOL_RENAME do not impact expiration while the file is open.
Once the file is closed or if the FH4_NOEXPIRE_WITH_OPEN bit is
false, the rest of the volatile related bits apply.
FH4_VOLATILE_ANY
The filehandle may expire at any time and will expire during
system migration and rename.
FH4_VOL_MIGRATION
The filehandle will expire during file system migration. May
only be set if FH4_VOLATILE_ANY is not set.
FH4_VOL_RENAME
The filehandle may expire due to a rename. This includes a
rename by the requesting client or a rename by another client.
May only be set if FH4_VOLATILE_ANY is not set.
Servers which provide volatile filehandles should deny a RENAME or
REMOVE that would affect an OPEN file or any of the components
leading to the OPEN file. In addition, the server should deny all
RENAME or REMOVE requests during the grace or lease period upon
server restart.
The reader may be wondering why there are three FH4_VOL* bits and why
FH4_VOLATILE_ANY is exclusive of FH4_VOL_MIGRATION and
FH4_VOL_RENAME. If the a filehandle is normally persistent but
cannot persist across a file set migration, then the presence of the
Expires: December 2002 [Page 29]
Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol July 2002
FH4_VOL_MIGRATION or FH4_VOL_RENAME tells the client that it can
treat the file handle as persistent for purposes of maintaining a
file name to file handle cache, except for the specific event
described by the bit. However, FH4_VOLATILE_ANY tells the client
that it should not maintain such a cache for unopened files. A
server MUST not present FH4_VOLATILE_ANY with FH4_VOL_MIGRATION or
FH4_VOL_RENAME as this will lead to confusion. FH4_VOLATILE_ANY
implies that the file handle will expire upon migration or rename, in
addition to other events.
4.2.4. One Method of Constructing a Volatile Filehandle
As mentioned, in some instances a filehandle is stale (no longer
valid; perhaps because the file was removed from the server) or it is
expired (the underlying file is valid but since the filehandle is
volatile, it may have expired). Thus the server needs to be able to
return NFS4ERR_STALE in the former case and NFS4ERR_FHEXPIRED in the
latter case. This can be done by careful construction of the volatile
filehandle. One possible implementation follows.
A volatile filehandle, while opaque to the client could contain:
[volatile bit = 1 | server boot time | slot | generation number]
o slot is an index in the server volatile filehandle table
o generation number is the generation number for the table
entry/slot
If the server boot time is less than the current server boot time,
return NFS4ERR_FHEXPIRED. If slot is out of range, return
NFS4ERR_BADHANDLE. If the generation number does not match, return
NFS4ERR_FHEXPIRED.
When the server reboots, the table is gone (it is volatile).
If volatile bit is 0, then it is a persistent filehandle with a
different structure following it.
4.3. Client Recovery from Filehandle Expiration
If possible, the client SHOULD recover from the receipt of an
NFS4ERR_FHEXPIRED error. The client must take on additional
responsibility so that it may prepare itself to recover from the
expiration of a volatile filehandle. If the server returns
persistent filehandles, the client does not need these additional
steps.
Expires: December 2002 [Page 30]
Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol July 2002
For volatile filehandles, most commonly the client will need to store
the component names leading up to and including the file system
object in question. With these names, the client should be able to
recover by finding a filehandle in the name space that is still
available or by starting at the root of the server's file system name
space.
If the expired filehandle refers to an object that has been removed
from the file system, obviously the client will not be able to
recover from the expired filehandle.
It is also possible that the expired filehandle refers to a file that
has been renamed. If the file was renamed by another client, again
it is possible that the original client will not be able to recover.
However, in the case that the client itself is renaming the file and
the file is open, it is possible that the client may be able to
recover. The client can determine the new path name based on the
processing of the rename request. The client can then regenerate the
new filehandle based on the new path name. The client could also use
the compound operation mechanism to construct a set of operations
like:
RENAME A B
LOOKUP B
GETFH
Expires: December 2002 [Page 31]
Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol July 2002
5. File Attributes
To meet the requirements of extensibility and increased
interoperability with non-Unix platforms, attributes must be handled
in a flexible manner. The NFS Version 3 fattr3 structure contains a
fixed list of attributes that not all clients and servers are able to
support or care about. The fattr3 structure can not be extended as
new needs arise and it provides no way to indicate non-support. With
the NFS Version 4 protocol, the client will be able to ask what
attributes the server supports and will be able to request only those
attributes in which it is interested.
To this end, attributes will be divided into three groups: mandatory,
recommended, and named. Both mandatory and recommended attributes
are supported in the NFS version 4 protocol by a specific and well-
defined encoding and are identified by number. They are requested by
setting a bit in the bit vector sent in the GETATTR request; the
server response includes a bit vector to list what attributes were
returned in the response. New mandatory or recommended attributes
may be added to the NFS protocol between major revisions by
publishing a standards-track RFC which allocates a new attribute
number value and defines the encoding for the attribute. See the
section "Minor Versioning" for further discussion.
Named attributes are accessed by the new OPENATTR operation, which
accesses a hidden directory of attributes associated with a file
system object. OPENATTR takes a filehandle for the object and
returns the filehandle for the attribute hierarchy. The filehandle
for the named attributes is a directory object accessible by LOOKUP
or READDIR and contains files whose names represent the named
attributes and whose data bytes are the value of the attribute. For
example:
LOOKUP "foo" ; look up file
GETATTR attrbits
OPENATTR ; access foo's named attributes
LOOKUP "x11icon" ; look up specific attribute
READ 0,4096 ; read stream of bytes
Named attributes are intended for data needed by applications rather
than by an NFS client implementation. NFS implementors are strongly
encouraged to define their new attributes as recommended attributes
by bringing them to the IETF standards-track process.
The set of attributes which are classified as mandatory is
deliberately small since servers must do whatever it takes to support
them. The recommended attributes may be unsupported; though a server
should support as many as it can. Attributes are deemed mandatory if
the data is both needed by a large number of clients and is not
otherwise reasonably computable by the client when support is not
Expires: December 2002 [Page 32]
Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol July 2002
provided on the server.
5.1. Mandatory Attributes
These MUST be supported by every NFS Version 4 client and server in
order to ensure a minimum level of interoperability. The server must
store and return these attributes and the client must be able to
function with an attribute set limited to these attributes. With
just the mandatory attributes some client functionality may be
impaired or limited in some ways. A client may ask for any of these
attributes to be returned by setting a bit in the GETATTR request and
the server must return their value.
5.2. Recommended Attributes
These attributes are understood well enough to warrant support in the
NFS Version 4 protocol. However, they may not be supported on all
clients and servers. A client may ask for any of these attributes to
be returned by setting a bit in the GETATTR request but must handle
the case where the server does not return them. A client may ask for
the set of attributes the server supports and should not request
attributes the server does not support. A server should be tolerant
of requests for unsupported attributes and simply not return them
rather than considering the request an error. It is expected that
servers will support all attributes they comfortably can and only
fail to support attributes which are difficult to support in their
operating environments. A server should provide attributes whenever
they don't have to "tell lies" to the client. For example, a file
modification time should be either an accurate time or should not be
supported by the server. This will not always be comfortable to
clients but it seems that the client has a better ability to
fabricate or construct an attribute or do without the attribute.
5.3. Named Attributes
These attributes are not supported by direct encoding in the NFS
Version 4 protocol but are accessed by string names rather than
numbers and correspond to an uninterpreted stream of bytes which are
stored with the file system object. The name space for these
attributes may be accessed by using the OPENATTR operation. The
OPENATTR operation returns a filehandle for a virtual "attribute
directory" and further perusal of the name space may be done using
READDIR and LOOKUP operations on this filehandle. Named attributes
may then be examined or changed by normal READ and WRITE and CREATE
operations on the filehandles returned from READDIR and LOOKUP.
Named attributes may have attributes.
It is recommended that servers support arbitrary named attributes. A
client should not depend on the ability to store any named attributes
Expires: December 2002 [Page 33]
Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol July 2002
in the server's file system. If a server does support named
attributes, a client which is also able to handle them should be able
to copy a file's data and meta-data with complete transparency from
one location to another; this would imply that names allowed for
regular directory entries are valid for named attribute names as
well.
Names of attributes will not be controlled by this document or other
IETF standards track documents. See the section "IANA
Considerations" for further discussion.
Expires: December 2002 [Page 34]
Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol July 2002
5.4. Mandatory Attributes - Definitions
Name # DataType Access Description
___________________________________________________________________
supp_attr 0 bitmap READ
The bit vector which
would retrieve all
mandatory and
recommended attributes
that are supported for
this object.
type 1 nfs4_ftype READ
The type of the object
(file, directory,
symlink)
fh_expire_type 2 uint32 READ
Server uses this to
specify filehandle
expiration behavior to
the client. See the
section "Filehandles"
for additional
description.
change 3 uint64 READ
A value created by the
server that the client
can use to determine
if file data,
directory contents or
attributes of the
object have been
modified. The server
may return the
object's time_modify
attribute for this
attribute's value but
only if the file
system object can not
be updated more
frequently than the
resolution of
time_modify.
size 4 uint64 R/W
The size of the object
in bytes.
link_support 5 bool READ
Does the object's file
system supports hard
links?
Expires: December 2002 [Page 35]
Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol July 2002
symlink_support 6 bool READ
Does the object's file
system supports
symbolic links?
named_attr 7 bool READ
Does this object have
named attributes?
fsid 8 fsid4 READ
Unique file system
identifier for the
file system holding
this object. fsid
contains major and
minor components each
of which are uint64.
unique_handles 9 bool READ
Are two distinct
filehandles guaranteed
to refer to two
different file system
objects?
lease_time 10 nfs_lease4 READ
Duration of leases at
server in seconds.
rdattr_error 11 enum READ
Error returned from
getattr during
readdir.
filehandle 19 nfs_fh4 READ
The filehandle of this
object (primarily for
readdir requests).
Expires: December 2002 [Page 36]
Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol July 2002
5.5. Recommended Attributes - Definitions
Name # Data Type Access Description
_____________________________________________________________________
ACL 12 nfsace4<> R/W
The access control
list for the object.
aclsupport 13 uint32 READ
Indicates what types
of ACLs are supported
on the current file
system.
archive 14 bool R/W
Whether or not this
file has been
archived since the
time of last
modification
(deprecated in favor
of time_backup).
cansettime 15 bool READ
Is the server able to
change the times for
a file system object
as specified in a
SETATTR operation?
case_insensitive 16 bool READ
Are filename
comparisons on this
file system case
insensitive?
case_preserving 17 bool READ
Is filename case on
this file system
preserved?
chown_restricted 18 bool READ
If TRUE, the server
will reject any
request to change
either the owner or
the group associated
with a file if the
caller is not a
privileged user (for
example, "root" in
Unix operating
environments or in NT
the "Take Ownership"
privilege)
Expires: December 2002 [Page 37]
Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol July 2002
fileid 20 uint64 READ
A number uniquely
identifying the file
within the file
system.
files_avail 21 uint64 READ
File slots available
to this user on the
file system
containing this
object - this should
be the smallest
relevant limit.
files_free 22 uint64 READ
Free file slots on
the file system
containing this
object - this should
be the smallest
relevant limit.
files_total 23 uint64 READ
Total file slots on
the file system
containing this
object.
fs_locations 24 fs_locations READ
Locations where this
file system may be
found. If the server
returns NFS4ERR_MOVED
as an error, this
attribute must be
supported.
hidden 25 bool R/W
Is file considered
hidden with respect
to the WIN32 API?
homogeneous 26 bool READ
Whether or not this
object's file system
is homogeneous, i.e.
are per file system
attributes the same
for all file system's
objects.
maxfilesize 27 uint64 READ
Maximum supported
file size for the
file system of this
object.
Expires: December 2002 [Page 38]
Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol July 2002
maxlink 28 uint32 READ
Maximum number of
links for this
object.
maxname 29 uint32 READ
Maximum filename size
supported for this
object.
maxread 30 uint64 READ
Maximum read size
supported for this
object.
maxwrite 31 uint64 READ
Maximum write size
supported for this
object. This
attribute SHOULD be
supported if the file
is writable. Lack of
this attribute can
lead to the client
either wasting
bandwidth or not
receiving the best
performance.
mimetype 32 utf8<> R/W
MIME body
type/subtype of this
object.
mode 33 mode4 R/W
Unix-style permission
bits for this object
(deprecated in favor
of ACLs)
no_trunc 34 bool READ
If a name longer than
name_max is used,
will an error be
returned or will the
name be truncated?
numlinks 35 uint32 READ
Number of hard links
to this object.
owner 36 utf8<> R/W
The string name of
the owner of this
object.
owner_group 37 utf8<> R/W
The string name of
the group ownership
of this object.
Expires: December 2002 [Page 39]
Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol July 2002
quota_avail_hard 38 uint64 READ
For definition see
"Quota Attributes"
section below.
quota_avail_soft 39 uint64 READ
For definition see
"Quota Attributes"
section below.
quota_used 40 uint64 READ
For definition see
"Quota Attributes"
section below.
rawdev 41 specdata4 READ
Raw device
identifier. Unix
device major/minor
node information.
space_avail 42 uint64 READ
Disk space in bytes
available to this
user on the file
system containing
this object - this
should be the
smallest relevant
limit.
space_free 43 uint64 READ
Free disk space in
bytes on the file
system containing
this object - this
should be the
smallest relevant
limit.
space_total 44 uint64 READ
Total disk space in
bytes on the file
system containing
this object.
space_used 45 uint64 READ
Number of file system
bytes allocated to
this object.
system 46 bool R/W
Is this file a system
file with respect to
the WIN32 API?
time_access 47 nfstime4 READ
The time of last
access to the object.
Expires: December 2002 [Page 40]
Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol July 2002
time_access_set 48 settime4 WRITE
Set the time of last
access to the object.
SETATTR use only.
time_backup 49 nfstime4 R/W
The time of last
backup of the object.
time_create 50 nfstime4 R/W
The time of creation
of the object. This
attribute does not
have any relation to
the traditional Unix
file attribute
"ctime" or "change
time".
time_delta 51 nfstime4 READ
Smallest useful
server time
granularity.
time_metadata 52 nfstime4 R/W
The time of last
meta-data
modification of the
object.
time_modify 53 nfstime4 READ
The time of last
modification to the
object.
time_modify_set 54 settime4 WRITE
Set the time of last
modification to the
object. SETATTR use
only.
5.6. Interpreting owner and owner_group
The recommended attributes "owner" and "owner_group" (and also users
and groups within the "acl" attribute) are represented in terms of a
UTF-8 string. To avoid a representation that is tied to a particular
underlying implementation at the client or server, the use of the
UTF-8 string has been chosen. Note that section 6.1 of [RFC2624]
provides additional rationale. It is expected that the client and
server will have their own local representation of owner and
owner_group that is used for local storage or presentation to the end
user. Therefore, it is expected that when these attributes are
transferred between the client and server that the local
representation is translated to a syntax of the form
"user@dns_domain". This will allow for a client and server that do
not use the same local representation the ability to translate to a
common syntax that can be interpreted by both.
Expires: December 2002 [Page 41]
Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol July 2002
Similarly, security principals may be represented in different ways
by different security mechanisms. Servers normally translate these
representations into a common format, generally that used by local
storage, to serve as a means of identifying the users corresponding
to these security principals. When these local identifiers are
translated to the form of the owner attribute, associated with files
created by such principals they identify, in a common format, the
users associated with each corresponding set of security principals.
The translation used to interpret owner and group strings is not
specified as part of the protocol. This allows various solutions to
be employed. For example, a local translation table may be consulted
that maps between a numeric id to the user@dns_domain syntax. A name
service may also be used to accomplish the translation. A server may
provide a more general service, not limited by any particular
translation (which would only translate a limited set of possible
strings) by storing the owner and owner_group attributes in local
storage without any translation or it may augment a translation
method by storing the entire string for attributes for which no
translation is available while using the local representation for
those cases in which a translation is available.
Servers that do not provide support for all possible values of the
owner and owner_group attributes, should return an error
(NFS4ERR_BADOWNER) when a string is presented that has no
translation, as the value to be set for a SETATTR of the owner,
owner_group, or acl attributes. When a server does accept an owner
or owner_group value as valid on a SETATTR (and similarly for the
owner and group strings in an acl), it is promising to return that
same string when a corresponding GETATTR is done. Configuration
changes and ill-constructed name translations (those that contain
aliasing) may make that promise impossible to honor. Servers should
make appropriate efforts to avoid a situation in which these
attributes have their values changed when no real change to ownership
has occurred.
The "dns_domain" portion of the owner string is meant to be a DNS
domain name. For example, user@ietf.org. Servers should accept as
valid a set of users for at least one domain. A server may treat
other domains as having no valid translations. A more general
service is provided when a server is capable of accepting users for
multiple domains, or for all domains, subject to security
constraints.
In the case where there is no translation available to the client or
server, the attribute value must be constructed without the "@".
Therefore, the absence of the @ from the owner or owner_group
attribute signifies that no translation was available at the sender
and that the receiver of the attribute should not use that string as
a basis for translation into its own internal format. Even though
the attribute value can not be translated, it may still be useful.
In the case of a client, the attribute string may be used for local
Expires: December 2002 [Page 42]
Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol July 2002
display of ownership.
To provide a greater degree of compatibility with previous versions
of NFS (i.e. v2 and v3), which identified users and groups by 32-bit
unsigned uid's and gid's, owner and group strings that consist of
decimal numeric values with no leading zeros can be given a special
interpretation by clients and servers which choose to provide such
support. The receiver may treat such a user or group string as
representing the same user as would be represented by a v2/v3 uid or
gid having the corresponding numeric value. A server is not
obligated to accept such a string, but may return an NFS4ERR_BADOWNER
instead. To avoid this mechanism being used to subvert user and
group translation, so that a client might pass all of the owners and
groups in numeric form, a server SHOULD return an NFS4ERR_BADOWNER
error when there is a valid translation for the user or owner
designated in this way. In that case, the client must use the
appropriate name@domain string and not the special form for
compatibility.
The owner string "nobody" may be used to designate an anonymous user,
which will be associated with a file created by a security principal
that cannot be mapped through normal means to the owner attribute.
5.7. Character Case Attributes
With respect to the case_insensitive and case_preserving attributes,
each UCS-4 character (which UTF-8 encodes) has a "long descriptive
name" [RFC1345] which may or may not included the word "CAPITAL" or
"SMALL". The presence of SMALL or CAPITAL allows an NFS server to
implement unambiguous and efficient table driven mappings for case
insensitive comparisons, and non-case-preserving storage. For
general character handling and internationalization issues, see the
section "Internationalization".
5.8. Quota Attributes
For the attributes related to file system quotas, the following
definitions apply:
quota_avail_soft
The value in bytes which represents the amount of additional
disk space that can be allocated to this file or directory
before the user may reasonably be warned. It is understood that
this space may be consumed by allocations to other files or
directories though there is a rule as to which other files or
directories.
quota_avail_hard
The value in bytes which represent the amount of additional disk
Expires: December 2002 [Page 43]
Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol July 2002
space beyond the current allocation that can be allocated to
this file or directory before further allocations will be
refused. It is understood that this space may be consumed by
allocations to other files or directories.
quota_used
The value in bytes which represent the amount of disc space used
by this file or directory and possibly a number of other similar
files or directories, where the set of "similar" meets at least
the criterion that allocating space to any file or directory in
the set will reduce the "quota_avail_hard" of every other file
or directory in the set.
Note that there may be a number of distinct but overlapping sets
of files or directories for which a quota_used value is
maintained. E.g. "all files with a given owner", "all files with
a given group owner". etc.
The server is at liberty to choose any of those sets but should
do so in a repeatable way. The rule may be configured per-
filesystem or may be "choose the set with the smallest quota".
5.9. Access Control Lists
The NFS ACL attribute is an array of access control entries (ACE).
There are various access control entry types. The server is able to
communicate which ACE types are supported by returning the
appropriate value within the aclsupport attribute. The types of ACEs
are defined as follows:
Type Description
_____________________________________________________
ALLOW
Explicitly grants the access defined in
acemask4 to the file or directory.
DENY
Explicitly denies the access defined in
acemask4 to the file or directory.
AUDIT
LOG (system dependent) any access
attempt to a file or directory which
uses any of the access methods specified
in acemask4.
ALARM
Generate a system ALARM (system
dependent) when any access attempt is
made to a file or directory for the
access methods specified in acemask4.
The NFS ACE attribute is defined as follows:
Expires: December 2002 [Page 44]
Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol July 2002
typedef uint32_t acetype4;
typedef uint32_t aceflag4;
typedef uint32_t acemask4;
struct nfsace4 {
acetype4 type;
aceflag4 flag;
acemask4 access_mask;
utf8string who;
};
To determine if an ACCESS or OPEN request succeeds each nfsace4 entry
is processed in order by the server. Only ACEs which have a "who"
that matches the requester are considered. Each ACE is processed
until all of the bits of the requester's access have been ALLOWED.
Once a bit (see below) has been ALLOWED by an ACCESS_ALLOWED_ACE, it
is no longer considered in the processing of later ACEs. If an
ACCESS_DENIED_ACE is encountered where the requester's mode still has
unALLOWED bits in common with the "access_mask" of the ACE, the
request is denied.
The bitmask constants used to represent the above definitions within
the aclsupport attribute are as follows:
const ACL4_SUPPORT_ALLOW_ACL = 0x00000001;
const ACL4_SUPPORT_DENY_ACL = 0x00000002;
const ACL4_SUPPORT_AUDIT_ACL = 0x00000004;
const ACL4_SUPPORT_ALARM_ACL = 0x00000008;
5.9.1. ACE type
The semantics of the "type" field follow the descriptions provided
above.
The bitmask constants used for the type field are as follows:
const ACE4_ACCESS_ALLOWED_ACE_TYPE = 0x00000000;
const ACE4_ACCESS_DENIED_ACE_TYPE = 0x00000001;
const ACE4_SYSTEM_AUDIT_ACE_TYPE = 0x00000002;
const ACE4_SYSTEM_ALARM_ACE_TYPE = 0x00000003;
5.9.2. ACE flag
The "flag" field contains values based on the following descriptions.
ACE4_FILE_INHERIT_ACE
Can be placed on a directory and indicates that this ACE should be
added to each new non-directory file created.
Expires: December 2002 [Page 45]
Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol July 2002
ACE4_DIRECTORY_INHERIT_ACE
Can be placed on a directory and indicates that this ACE should be
added to each new directory created.
ACE4_INHERIT_ONLY_ACE
Can be placed on a directory but does not apply to the directory,
only to newly created files/directories as specified by the above two
flags.
ACE4_NO_PROPAGATE_INHERIT_ACE
Can be placed on a directory. Normally when a new directory is
created and an ACE exists on the parent directory which is marked
ACL4_DIRECTORY_INHERIT_ACE, two ACEs are placed on the new directory.
One for the directory itself and one which is an inheritable ACE for
newly created directories. This flag tells the server to not place
an ACE on the newly created directory which is inheritable by
subdirectories of the created directory.
ACE4_SUCCESSFUL_ACCESS_ACE_FLAG
ACL4_FAILED_ACCESS_ACE_FLAG
Both indicate for AUDIT and ALARM which state to log the event. On
every ACCESS or OPEN call which occurs on a file or directory which
has an ACL that is of type ACE4_SYSTEM_AUDIT_ACE_TYPE or
ACE4_SYSTEM_ALARM_ACE_TYPE, the attempted access is compared to the
ace4mask of these ACLs. If the access is a subset of ace4mask and the
identifier match, an AUDIT trail or an ALARM is generated. By
default this happens regardless of the success or failure of the
ACCESS or OPEN call.
The flag ACE4_SUCCESSFUL_ACCESS_ACE_FLAG only produces the AUDIT or
ALARM if the ACCESS or OPEN call is successful. The
ACE4_FAILED_ACCESS_ACE_FLAG causes the ALARM or AUDIT if the ACCESS
or OPEN call fails.
ACE4_IDENTIFIER_GROUP
Indicates that the "who" refers to a GROUP as defined under Unix.
The bitmask constants used for the flag field are as follows:
const ACE4_FILE_INHERIT_ACE = 0x00000001;
Expires: December 2002 [Page 46]
Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol July 2002
const ACE4_DIRECTORY_INHERIT_ACE = 0x00000002;
const ACE4_NO_PROPAGATE_INHERIT_ACE = 0x00000004;
const ACE4_INHERIT_ONLY_ACE = 0x00000008;
const ACE4_SUCCESSFUL_ACCESS_ACE_FLAG = 0x00000010;
const ACE4_FAILED_ACCESS_ACE_FLAG = 0x00000020;
const ACE4_IDENTIFIER_GROUP = 0x00000040;
5.9.3. ACE Access Mask
The access_mask field contains values based on the following:
Access Description
_______________________________________________________________
READ_DATA
Permission to read the data of the file
LIST_DIRECTORY
Permission to list the contents of a
directory
WRITE_DATA
Permission to modify the file's data
ADD_FILE
Permission to add a new file to a
directory
APPEND_DATA
Permission to append data to a file
ADD_SUBDIRECTORY
Permission to create a subdirectory to a
directory
READ_NAMED_ATTRS
Permission to read the named attributes
of a file
WRITE_NAMED_ATTRS
Permission to write the named attributes
of a file
EXECUTE
Permission to execute a file
DELETE_CHILD
Permission to delete a file or directory
within a directory
READ_ATTRIBUTES
The ability to read basic attributes
(non-acls) of a file
WRITE_ATTRIBUTES
Permission to change basic attributes
(non-acls) of a file
DELETE
Permission to Delete the file
READ_ACL
Permission to Read the ACL
WRITE_ACL
Permission to Write the ACL
WRITE_OWNER
Permission to change the owner
SYNCHRONIZE
Permission to access file locally at the
server with synchronous reads and writes
The bitmask constants used for the access mask field are as follows:
const ACE4_READ_DATA = 0x00000001;
const ACE4_LIST_DIRECTORY = 0x00000001;
const ACE4_WRITE_DATA = 0x00000002;
const ACE4_ADD_FILE = 0x00000002;
const ACE4_APPEND_DATA = 0x00000004;
const ACE4_ADD_SUBDIRECTORY = 0x00000004;
const ACE4_READ_NAMED_ATTRS = 0x00000008;
Expires: December 2002 [Page 47]
Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol July 2002
const ACE4_WRITE_NAMED_ATTRS = 0x00000010;
const ACE4_EXECUTE = 0x00000020;
const ACE4_DELETE_CHILD = 0x00000040;
const ACE4_READ_ATTRIBUTES = 0x00000080;
const ACE4_WRITE_ATTRIBUTES = 0x00000100;
const ACE4_DELETE = 0x00010000;
const ACE4_READ_ACL = 0x00020000;
const ACE4_WRITE_ACL = 0x00040000;
const ACE4_WRITE_OWNER = 0x00080000;
const ACE4_SYNCHRONIZE = 0x00100000;
5.9.4. ACE who
There are several special identifiers ("who") which need to be
understood universally. Some of these identifiers cannot be
understood when an NFS client accesses the server, but have meaning
when a local process accesses the file. The ability to display and
modify these permissions is permitted over NFS.
Who Description
_______________________________________________________________
"OWNER"
The owner of the file.
"GROUP"
The group associated with the file.
"EVERYONE"
The world.
"INTERACTIVE"
Accessed from an interactive terminal.
"NETWORK"
Accessed via the network.
"DIALUP"
Accessed as a dialup user to the server.
"BATCH"
Accessed from a batch job.
"ANONYMOUS"
Accessed without any authentication.
"AUTHENTICATED"
Any authenticated user (opposite of
ANONYMOUS)
"SERVICE"
Access from a system service.
To avoid conflict, these special identifiers are distinguish by an
appended "@" and should appear in the form "xxxx@" (note: no domain
name after the "@"). For example: ANONYMOUS@.
Expires: December 2002 [Page 48]
Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol July 2002
6. File System Migration and Replication
With the use of the recommended attribute "fs_locations", the NFS
version 4 server has a method of providing file system migration or
replication services. For the purposes of migration and replication,
a file system will be defined as all files that share a given fsid
(both major and minor values are the same).
The fs_locations attribute provides a list of file system locations.
These locations are specified by providing the server name (either
DNS domain or IP address) and the path name representing the root of
the file system. Depending on the type of service being provided,
the list will provide a new location or a set of alternate locations
for the file system. The client will use this information to
redirect its requests to the new server.
6.1. Replication
It is expected that file system replication will be used in the case
of read-only data. Typically, the file system will be replicated on
two or more servers. The fs_locations attribute will provide the
list of these locations to the client. On first access of the file
system, the client should obtain the value of the fs_locations
attribute. If, in the future, the client finds the server
unresponsive, the client may attempt to use another server specified
by fs_locations.
If applicable, the client must take the appropriate steps to recover
valid filehandles from the new server. This is described in more
detail in the following sections.
6.2. Migration
File system migration is used to move a file system from one server
to another. Migration is typically used for a file system that is
writable and has a single copy. The expected use of migration is for
load balancing or general resource reallocation. The protocol does
not specify how the file system will be moved between servers. This
server-to-server transfer mechanism is left to the server
implementor. However, the method used to communicate the migration
event between client and server is specified here.
Once the servers participating in the migration have completed the
move of the file system, the error NFS4ERR_MOVED will be returned for
subsequent requests received by the original server. The
NFS4ERR_MOVED error is returned for all operations except PUTFH and
GETATTR. Upon receiving the NFS4ERR_MOVED error, the client will
obtain the value of the fs_locations attribute. The client will then
use the contents of the attribute to redirect its requests to the
specified server. To facilitate the use of GETATTR, operations such
Expires: December 2002 [Page 49]
Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol July 2002
as PUTFH must also be accepted by the server for the migrated file
system's filehandles. Note that if the server returns NFS4ERR_MOVED,
the server MUST support the fs_locations attribute.
If the client requests more attributes than just fs_locations, the
server may return fs_locations only. This is to be expected since
the server has migrated the file system and may not have a method of
obtaining additional attribute data.
The server implementor needs to be careful in developing a migration
solution. The server must consider all of the state information
clients may have outstanding at the server. This includes but is not
limited to locking/share state, delegation state, and asynchronous
file writes which are represented by WRITE and COMMIT verifiers. The
server should strive to minimize the impact on its clients during and
after the migration process.
6.3. Interpretation of the fs_locations Attribute
The fs_location attribute is structured in the following way:
struct fs_location {
utf8string server<>;
pathname4 rootpath;
};
struct fs_locations {
pathname4 fs_root;
fs_location locations<>;
};
The fs_location struct is used to represent the location of a file
system by providing a server name and the path to the root of the
file system. For a multi-homed server or a set of servers that use
the same rootpath, an array of server names may be provided. An
entry in the server array is an UTF8 string and represents one of a
traditional DNS host name, IPv4 address, or IPv6 address. It is not
a requirement that all servers that share the same rootpath be listed
in one fs_location struct. The array of server names is provided for
convenience. Servers that share the same rootpath may also be listed
in separate fs_location entries in the fs_locations attribute.
The fs_locations struct and attribute then contains an array of
locations. Since the name space of each server may be constructed
differently, the "fs_root" field is provided. The path represented
by fs_root represents the location of the file system in the server's
name space. Therefore, the fs_root path is only associated with the
server from which the fs_locations attribute was obtained. The
fs_root path is meant to aid the client in locating the file system
at the various servers listed.
Expires: December 2002 [Page 50]
Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol July 2002
As an example, there is a replicated file system located at two
servers (servA and servB). At servA the file system is located at
path "/a/b/c". At servB the file system is located at path "/x/y/z".
In this example the client accesses the file system first at servA
with a multi-component lookup path of "/a/b/c/d". Since the client
used a multi-component lookup to obtain the filehandle at "/a/b/c/d",
it is unaware that the file system's root is located in servA's name
space at "/a/b/c". When the client switches to servB, it will need
to determine that the directory it first referenced at servA is now
represented by the path "/x/y/z/d" on servB. To facilitate this, the
fs_locations attribute provided by servA would have a fs_root value
of "/a/b/c" and two entries in fs_location. One entry in fs_location
will be for itself (servA) and the other will be for servB with a
path of "/x/y/z". With this information, the client is able to
substitute "/x/y/z" for the "/a/b/c" at the beginning of its access
path and construct "/x/y/z/d" to use for the new server.
6.4. Filehandle Recovery for Migration or Replication
Filehandles for file systems that are replicated or migrated
generally have the same semantics as for file systems that are not
replicated or migrated. For example, if a file system has persistent
filehandles and it is migrated to another server, the filehandle
values for the file system will be valid at the new server.
For volatile filehandles, the servers involved likely do not have a
mechanism to transfer filehandle format and content between
themselves. Therefore, a server may have difficulty in determining
if a volatile filehandle from an old server should return an error of
NFS4ERR_FHEXPIRED. Therefore, the client is informed, with the use
of the fh_expire_type attribute, whether volatile filehandles will
expire at the migration or replication event. If the bit
FH4_VOL_MIGRATION is set in the fh_expire_type attribute, the client
must treat the volatile filehandle as if the server had returned the
NFS4ERR_FHEXPIRED error. At the migration or replication event in
the presence of the FH4_VOL_MIGRATION bit, the client will not
present the original or old volatile file handle to the new server.
The client will start its communication with the new server by
recovering its filehandles using the saved file names.
Expires: December 2002 [Page 51]
Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol July 2002
7. NFS Server Name Space
7.1. Server Exports
On a UNIX server the name space describes all the files reachable by
pathnames under the root directory or "/". On a Windows NT server
the name space constitutes all the files on disks named by mapped
disk letters. NFS server administrators rarely make the entire
server's file system name space available to NFS clients. More often
portions of the name space are made available via an "export"
feature. In previous versions of the NFS protocol, the root
filehandle for each export is obtained through the MOUNT protocol;
the client sends a string that identifies the export of name space
and the server returns the root filehandle for it. The MOUNT
protocol supports an EXPORTS procedure that will enumerate the
server's exports.
7.2. Browsing Exports
The NFS version 4 protocol provides a root filehandle that clients
can use to obtain filehandles for these exports via a multi-component
LOOKUP. A common user experience is to use a graphical user
interface (perhaps a file "Open" dialog window) to find a file via
progressive browsing through a directory tree. The client must be
able to move from one export to another export via single-component,
progressive LOOKUP operations.
This style of browsing is not well supported by the NFS version 2 and
3 protocols. The client expects all LOOKUP operations to remain
within a single server file system. For example, the device
attribute will not change. This prevents a client from taking name
space paths that span exports.
An automounter on the client can obtain a snapshot of the server's
name space using the EXPORTS procedure of the MOUNT protocol. If it
understands the server's pathname syntax, it can create an image of
the server's name space on the client. The parts of the name space
that are not exported by the server are filled in with a "pseudo file
system" that allows the user to browse from one mounted file system
to another. There is a drawback to this representation of the
server's name space on the client: it is static. If the server
administrator adds a new export the client will be unaware of it.
7.3. Server Pseudo File System
NFS version 4 servers avoid this name space inconsistency by
presenting all the exports within the framework of a single server
name space. An NFS version 4 client uses LOOKUP and READDIR
operations to browse seamlessly from one export to another. Portions
Expires: December 2002 [Page 52]
Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol July 2002
of the server name space that are not exported are bridged via a
"pseudo file system" that provides a view of exported directories
only. A pseudo file system has a unique fsid and behaves like a
normal, read only file system.
Based on the construction of the server's name space, it is possible
that multiple pseudo file systems may exist. For example,
/a pseudo file system
/a/b real file system
/a/b/c pseudo file system
/a/b/c/d real file system
Each of the pseudo file systems are consider separate entities and
therefore will have a unique fsid.
7.4. Multiple Roots
The DOS and Windows operating environments are sometimes described as
having "multiple roots". File systems are commonly represented as
disk letters. MacOS represents file systems as top level names. NFS
version 4 servers for these platforms can construct a pseudo file
system above these root names so that disk letters or volume names
are simply directory names in the pseudo root.
7.5. Filehandle Volatility
The nature of the server's pseudo file system is that it is a logical
representation of file system(s) available from the server.
Therefore, the pseudo file system is most likely constructed
dynamically when the server is first instantiated. It is expected
that the pseudo file system may not have an on disk counterpart from
which persistent filehandles could be constructed. Even though it is
preferable that the server provide persistent filehandles for the
pseudo file system, the NFS client should expect that pseudo file
system filehandles are volatile. This can be confirmed by checking
the associated "fh_expire_type" attribute for those filehandles in
question. If the filehandles are volatile, the NFS client must be
prepared to recover a filehandle value (e.g. with a multi-component
LOOKUP) when receiving an error of NFS4ERR_FHEXPIRED.
7.6. Exported Root
If the server's root file system is exported, one might conclude that
a pseudo-file system is not needed. This would be wrong. Assume the
following file systems on a server:
/ disk1 (exported)
/a disk2 (not exported)
Expires: December 2002 [Page 53]
Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol July 2002
/a/b disk3 (exported)
Because disk2 is not exported, disk3 cannot be reached with simple
LOOKUPs. The server must bridge the gap with a pseudo-file system.
7.7. Mount Point Crossing
The server file system environment may be constructed in such a way
that one file system contains a directory which is 'covered' or
mounted upon by a second file system. For example:
/a/b (file system 1)
/a/b/c/d (file system 2)
The pseudo file system for this server may be constructed to look
like:
/ (place holder/not exported)
/a/b (file system 1)
/a/b/c/d (file system 2)
It is the server's responsibility to present the pseudo file system
that is complete to the client. If the client sends a lookup request
for the path "/a/b/c/d", the server's response is the filehandle of
the file system "/a/b/c/d". In previous versions of the NFS
protocol, the server would respond with the directory "/a/b/c/d"
within the file system "/a/b".
The NFS client will be able to determine if it crosses a server mount
point by a change in the value of the "fsid" attribute.
7.8. Security Policy and Name Space Presentation
The application of the server's security policy needs to be carefully
considered by the implementor. One may choose to limit the
viewability of portions of the pseudo file system based on the
server's perception of the client's ability to authenticate itself
properly. However, with the support of multiple security mechanisms
and the ability to negotiate the appropriate use of these mechanisms,
the server is unable to properly determine if a client will be able
to authenticate itself. If, based on its policies, the server
chooses to limit the contents of the pseudo file system, the server
may effectively hide file systems from a client that may otherwise
have legitimate access.
Expires: December 2002 [Page 54]
Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol July 2002
8. File Locking and Share Reservations
Integrating locking into the NFS protocol necessarily causes it to be
state-full. With the inclusion of "share" file locks the protocol
becomes substantially more dependent on state than the traditional
combination of NFS and NLM [XNFS]. There are three components to
making this state manageable:
o Clear division between client and server
o Ability to reliably detect inconsistency in state between client
and server
o Simple and robust recovery mechanisms
In this model, the server owns the state information. The client
communicates its view of this state to the server as needed. The
client is also able to detect inconsistent state before modifying a
file.
To support Win32 "share" locks it is necessary to atomically OPEN or
CREATE files. Having a separate share/unshare operation would not
allow correct implementation of the Win32 OpenFile API. In order to
correctly implement share semantics, the previous NFS protocol
mechanisms used when a file is opened or created (LOOKUP, CREATE,
ACCESS) need to be replaced. The NFS version 4 protocol has an OPEN
operation that subsumes the NFS version 3 methodology of LOOKUP,
CREATE, and ACCESS. However, because many operations require a
filehandle, the traditional LOOKUP is preserved to map a file name to
filehandle without establishing state on the server. The policy of
granting access or modifying files is managed by the server based on
the client's state. These mechanisms can implement policy ranging
from advisory only locking to full mandatory locking.
8.1. Locking
It is assumed that manipulating a lock is rare when compared to READ
and WRITE operations. It is also assumed that crashes and network
partitions are relatively rare. Therefore it is important that the
READ and WRITE operations have a lightweight mechanism to indicate if
they possess a held lock. A lock request contains the heavyweight
information required to establish a lock and uniquely define the lock
owner.
The following sections describe the transition from the heavy weight
information to the eventual stateid used for most client and server
locking and lease interactions.
8.1.1. Client ID
For each LOCK request, the client must identify itself to the server.
Expires: December 2002 [Page 55]
Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol July 2002
This is done in such a way as to allow for correct lock
identification and crash recovery. Client identification is
accomplished with two values.
o A verifier that is used to detect client reboots.
o A variable length opaque array to uniquely define a client.
For an operating system this may be a fully qualified host
name or IP address. For a user level NFS client it may
additionally contain a process id or other unique sequence.
The data structure for the Client ID would then appear as:
struct nfs_client_id {
opaque verifier[4];
opaque id<>;
}
It is possible through the mis-configuration of a client or the
existence of a rogue client that two clients end up using the same
nfs_client_id. This situation is avoided by "negotiating" the
nfs_client_id between client and server with the use of the
SETCLIENTID and SETCLIENTID_CONFIRM operations. The following
describes the two scenarios of negotiation.
1 Client has never connected to the server
In this case the client generates an nfs_client_id and
unless another client has the same nfs_client_id.id field,
the server accepts the request. The server also records the
principal (or principal to uid mapping) from the credential
in the RPC request that contains the nfs_client_id
negotiation request (SETCLIENTID operation).
Two clients might still use the same nfs_client_id.id due
to perhaps configuration error. For example, a High
Availability configuration where the nfs_client_id.id is
derived from the ethernet controller address and both
systems have the same address. In this case, the result is
a switched union that returns, in addition to
NFS4ERR_CLID_INUSE, the network address (the rpcbind netid
and universal address) of the client that is using the id.
2 Client is re-connecting to the server after a client reboot
In this case, the client still generates an nfs_client_id
but the nfs_client_id.id field will be the same as the
nfs_client_id.id generated prior to reboot. If the server
finds that the principal/uid is equal to the previously
"registered" nfs_client_id.id, the server creates and
Expires: December 2002 [Page 56]
Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol July 2002
returns a new clientid in response to the SETCLIENTID. If
the principal/uid is not equal, then this is a rogue client
and the request is returned in error. For more discussion
of crash recovery semantics, see the section on "Crash
Recovery".
It is possible for a retransmission of request to be received by the
server after the server has acted upon and responded to the original
client request. Therefore to mitigate effects of the retransmission
of the SETCLIENTID operation, the client and server use a
confirmation step. The client uses the SETCLIENTID_CONFIRM operation
with the server provided clientid to confirm the client's use of the
new clientid. Once the server receives the confirmation from the
client, the locking state for the client is released.
In both cases, upon success, NFS4_OK is returned. To help reduce the
amount of data transferred on OPEN and LOCK, the server will also
return a unique 64-bit clientid value that is a shorthand reference
to the nfs_client_id values presented by the client. From this point
forward, the client will use the clientid to refer to itself.
The clientid assigned by the server should be chosen so that it will
not conflict with a clientid previously assigned by the server. This
applies across server restarts or reboots. When a clientid is
presented to a server and that clientid is not recognized, as would
happen after a server reboot, the server will reject the request with
the error NFS4ERR_STALE_CLIENTID. When this happens, the client must
obtain a new clientid by use of the SETCLIENTID operation and then
proceed to any other necessary recovery for the server reboot case
(See the section "Server Failure and Recovery").
The client must also employ the SETCLIENTID operation when it
receives a NFS4ERR_STALE_STATEID error using a stateid derived from
its current clientid, since this also indicates a server reboot which
has invalidated the existing clientid (see the next section
"nfs_lockowner and stateid Definition" for details).
8.1.2. Server Release of Clientid
If the server determines that the client holds no associated state
for its clientid, the server may choose to release the clientid. The
server may make this choice for an inactive client so that resources
are not consumed by those intermittently active clients. If the
client contacts the server after this release, the server must ensure
the client receives the appropriate error so that it will use the
SETCLIENTID/SETCLIENTID_CONFIRM sequence to establish a new identity.
It should be clear that the server must be very hesitant to release a
clientid since the resulting work on the client to recover from such
an event will be the same burden as if the server had failed and
restarted. Typically a server would not release a clientid unless
there had been no activity from that client for many minutes.
Expires: December 2002 [Page 57]
Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol July 2002
8.1.3. nfs_lockowner and stateid Definition
When requesting a lock, the client must present to the server the
clientid and an identifier for the owner of the requested lock.
These two fields are referred to as the nfs_lockowner and the
definition of those fields are:
o A clientid returned by the server as part of the client's use of
the SETCLIENTID operation.
o A variable length opaque array used to uniquely define the owner
of a lock managed by the client.
This may be a thread id, process id, or other unique value.
When the server grants the lock, it responds with a unique 64-bit
stateid. The stateid is used as a shorthand reference to the
nfs_lockowner, since the server will be maintaining the
correspondence between them.
The server is free to form the stateid in any manner that it chooses
as long as it is able to recognize invalid and out-of-date stateids.
This requirement includes those stateids generated by earlier
instances of the server. From this, the client can be properly
notified of a server restart. This notification will occur when the
client presents a stateid to the server from a previous
instantiation.
The server must be able to distinguish the following situations and
return the error as specified:
o The stateid was generated by an earlier server instance (i.e.
before a server reboot). The error NFS4ERR_STALE_STATEID should
be returned.
o The stateid was generated by the current server instance but the
stateid no longer designates the current locking state for the
lockowner-file pair in question (i.e. one or more locking
operations has occurred). The error NFS4ERR_OLD_STATEID should
be returned.
This error condition will only occur when the client issues a
locking request which changes a stateid while an I/O request
that uses that stateid is outstanding.
o The stateid was generated by the current server instance but the
stateid does not designate a locking state for any active
lockowner-file pair. The error NFS4ERR_BAD_STATEID should be
returned.
This error condition will occur when there has been a logic
Expires: December 2002 [Page 58]
Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol July 2002
error on the part of the client or server. This should not
happen.
One mechanism that may be used to satisfy these requirements is for
the server to divide stateids into three fields:
o A server verifier which uniquely designates a particular server
instantiation.
o An index into a table of locking-state structures.
o A sequence value which is incremented for each stateid that is
associated with the same index into the locking-state table.
By matching the incoming stateid and its field values with the state
held at the server, the server is able to easily determine if a
stateid is valid for its current instantiation and state. If the
stateid is not valid, the appropriate error can be supplied to the
client.
8.1.4. Use of the stateid
All READ, WRITE and SETATTR operations contain a stateid. For the
purposes of this section, SETATTR operations which change the size
attribute of a file are treated as if they are writing the area
between the old and new size (i.e. the range truncated or added to
the file by means of the SETATTR), even where SETATTR is not
explicitly mentioned in the text.
If the nfs_lockowner performs a READ or WRITE in a situation in which
it has established a lock on the server (and for these purposes any
OPEN constitutes a share lock) the stateid (previously returned by
the server) must be used to indicate what locks, including both
record and share locks, are held by the lockowner. If no state is
established by the client, either record lock or share lock, a
stateid of all bits 0 is used. Regardless of whether a stateid of
all bits 0, or a stateid returned by the server is used, if no
conflicting locks are held on the file, the server may service the
READ or WRITE operation. If a conflict with an explicit lock occurs,
an error is returned for the operation (NFS4ERR_LOCKED). This allows
"mandatory locking" to be implemented.
Share locks are established by OPEN operations and by their nature
are mandatory in that when the OPEN denies READ or WRITE operations,
that denial results in such operations being rejected with error
NFS4ERR_LOCKED. Record locks may be implemented by the server as
either mandatory or advisory, or the choice of mandatory or advisory
behavior may be determined by the server on the basis of the file
being accessed. When record locks are advisory, they only prevent
the granting of conflicting lock requests and have no effect on
Expires: December 2002 [Page 59]
Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol July 2002
READ's or WRITE's. Mandatory record locks, however, prevent
conflicting IO operations and when they are attempted, they are
rejected with NFS4ERR_LOCKED.
Every stateid other than the special stateid values noted above,
whether returned by an OPEN-type operation (i.e. OPEN,
OPEN_DOWNGRADE), or by a LOCK-type operation (i.e. LOCK or LOCKU),
defines an access mode for the file (i.e. READ, WRITE, or READ_WRITE)
as established by the original OPEN which began the stateid sequence,
and as modified by subsequent OPEN's and OPEN_DOWNGRADE's within that
stateid sequence. When a READ, WRITE, or SETATTR which specifies the
size attribute, is done, the operation is subject to checking against
the access mode to verify that the operation is appropriate given the
OPEN with which the operation is associated.
In the case of WRITE-type operations (i.e. WRITE's and SETATTR's
which set size), the server must verify that the access mode allows
writing and return an NFS4ERR_OPENMODE error if it does not. In the
case, of READ, the server may perform the corresponding check on the
access mode, or it may choose to allow READ on opens for WRITE only,
to accommodate clients whose write implementation may unavoidably do
reads (e.g. due to buffer cache constraints). However, even if
READ's are allowed in these circumstances, the server MUST still
check for locks that conflict with the READ (e.g. another open
specify denial of READ's). Note that a server which does enforce the
access mode check on READ's need not explicitly check for conflicting
share reservations since the existence of OPEN for read access
guarantees that no conflicting share reservation can exist.
A stateid of all bits 1 (one) allows READ operations to bypass
locking checks at the server. However, WRITE operations with a
stateid with bits all 1 (one) do not bypass locking checks and are
treated exactly the same as if a stateid of all bits 0 were used.
An explicit lock may not be granted while a READ or WRITE operation
with conflicting implicit locking is being performed. For the
purposes of this paragraph, a READ is considered as having an
implicit shared record lock for the area being read while a WRITE is
considered as having an implicit exclusive record lock for the area
being written (and similarly for SETATTR's that set size as discussed
above).
8.1.5. Sequencing of Lock Requests
Locking is different than most NFS operations as it requires "at-
most-one" semantics that are not provided by ONCRPC. ONCRPC over a
reliable transport is not sufficient because a sequence of locking
requests may span multiple TCP connections. In the face of
retransmission or reordering, lock or unlock requests must have a
well defined and consistent behavior. To accomplish this, each lock
request contains a sequence number that is a consecutively increasing
Expires: December 2002 [Page 60]
Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol July 2002
integer. Different nfs_lockowners have different sequences. The
server maintains the last sequence number (L) received and the
response that was returned.
Note that for requests that contain a sequence number, for each
nfs_lockowner, there should be no more than one outstanding request.
If a request (r) with a previous sequence number (r < L) is received,
it is rejected with the return of error NFS4ERR_BAD_SEQID. Given a
properly-functioning client, the response to (r) must have been
received before the last request (L) was sent. If a duplicate of
last request (r == L) is received, the stored response is returned.
If a request beyond the next sequence (r == L + 2) is received, it is
rejected with the return of error NFS4ERR_BAD_SEQID. Sequence
history is reinitialized whenever the client verifier changes.
Since the sequence number is represented with an unsigned 32-bit
integer, the arithmetic involved with the sequence number is mod
2^32.
It is critical the server maintain the last response sent to the
client to provide a more reliable cache of duplicate non-idempotent
requests than that of the traditional cache described in [Juszczak].
The traditional duplicate request cache uses a least recently used
algorithm for removing unneeded requests. However, the last lock
request and response on a given nfs_lockowner must be cached as long
as the lock state exists on the server.
8.1.6. Recovery from Replayed Requests
As described above, the sequence number is per nfs_lockowner. As
long as the server maintains the last sequence number received and
follows the methods described above, there are no risks of a
Byzantine router re-sending old requests. The server need only
maintain the (nfs_lockowner, sequence number) state as long as there
are open files or closed files with locks outstanding.
LOCK, LOCKU, OPEN, OPEN_DOWNGRADE, and CLOSE each contain a sequence
number and therefore the risk of the replay of these operations
resulting in undesired effects is non-existent while the server
maintains the nfs_lockowner state.
8.1.7. Releasing nfs_lockowner State
When a particular nfs_lockowner no longer holds open or file locking
state at the server, the server may choose to release the sequence
number state associated with the nfs_lockowner. The server may make
this choice based on lease expiration, for the reclamation of server
memory, or other implementation specific details. In any event, the
server is able to do this safely only when the nfs_lockowner no
Expires: December 2002 [Page 61]
Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol July 2002
longer is being utilized by the client. The server may choose to
hold the nfs_lockowner state in the event that retransmitted requests
are received. However, the period to hold this state is
implementation specific.
In the case that a LOCK, LOCKU, OPEN_DOWNGRADE, or CLOSE is
retransmitted after the server has previously released the
nfs_lockowner state, the server will find that the nfs_lockowner has
no files open and an error will be returned to the client. If the
nfs_lockowner does have a file open, the stateid will not match and
again an error is returned to the client.
In the case that an OPEN is retransmitted and the nfs_lockowner is
being used for the first time or the nfs_lockowner state has been
previously released by the server, the use of the OPEN_CONFIRM
operation will prevent incorrect behavior. When the server observes
the use of the nfs_lockowner for the first time, it will direct the
client to perform the OPEN_CONFIRM for the corresponding OPEN. This
sequence establishes the use of an nfs_lockowner and associated
sequence number. See the section "OPEN_CONFIRM - Confirm Open" for
further details.
8.2. Lock Ranges
The protocol allows a lock owner to request a lock with a byte range
and then either upgrade or unlock a sub-range of the initial lock.
It is expected that this will be an uncommon type of request. In any
case, servers or server file systems may not be able to support sub-
range lock semantics. In the event that a server receives a locking
request that represents a sub-range of current locking state for the
lock owner, the server is allowed to return the error
NFS4ERR_LOCK_RANGE to signify that it does not support sub-range lock
operations. Therefore, the client should be prepared to receive this
error and, if appropriate, report the error to the requesting
application.
The client is discouraged from combining multiple independent locking
ranges that happen to be adjacent into a single request since the
server may not support sub-range requests and for reasons related to
the recovery of file locking state in the event of server failure.
As discussed in the section "Server Failure and Recovery" below, the
server may employ certain optimizations during recovery that work
effectively only when the client's behavior during lock recovery is
similar to the client's locking behavior prior to server failure.
8.3. Blocking Locks
Some clients require the support of blocking locks. The NFS version
4 protocol must not rely on a callback mechanism and therefore is
unable to notify a client when a previously denied lock has been
Expires: December 2002 [Page 62]
Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol July 2002
granted. Clients have no choice but to continually poll for the
lock. This presents a fairness problem. Two new lock types are
added, READW and WRITEW, and are used to indicate to the server that
the client is requesting a blocking lock. The server should maintain
an ordered list of pending blocking locks. When the conflicting lock
is released, the server may wait the lease period for the first
waiting client to re-request the lock. After the lease period
expires the next waiting client request is allowed the lock. Clients
are required to poll at an interval sufficiently small that it is
likely to acquire the lock in a timely manner. The server is not
required to maintain a list of pending blocked locks as it is used to
increase fairness and not correct operation. Because of the
unordered nature of crash recovery, storing of lock state to stable
storage would be required to guarantee ordered granting of blocking
locks.
Servers may also note the lock types and delay returning denial of
the request to allow extra time for a conflicting lock to be
released, allowing a successful return. In this way, clients can
avoid the burden of needlessly frequent polling for blocking locks.
The server should take care in the length of delay in the event the
client retransmits the request.
8.4. Lease Renewal
The purpose of a lease is to allow a server to remove stale locks
that are held by a client that has crashed or is otherwise
unreachable. It is not a mechanism for cache consistency and lease
renewals may not be denied if the lease interval has not expired.
The following events cause implicit renewal of all of the leases for
a given client (i.e. all those sharing a given clientid). Each of
these is a positive indication that the client is still active and
that the associated state held at the server, for the client, is
still valid.
o An OPEN with a valid clientid.
o Any operation made with a valid stateid (CLOSE, DELEGPURGE,
DELEGRETURN, LOCK, LOCKU, OPEN, OPEN_CONFIRM, OPEN_DOWNGRADE,
READ, RENEW, SETATTR, SETCLIENTID_CONFIRM, WRITE). This does
not include the special stateids of all bits 0 or all bits 1.
Note that if the client had restarted or rebooted, the
client would not be making these requests without issuing
the SETCLIENTID/SETCLIENTID_CONFIRM sequence. The use of
the SETCLIENTID/SETCLIENTID_CONFIRM operations notifies the
server to drop the locking state associated with the
client.
If the server has rebooted, the stateids
Expires: December 2002 [Page 63]
Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol July 2002
(NFS4ERR_STALE_STATEID error) or the clientid
(NFS4ERR_STALE_CLIENTID error) will not be valid hence
preventing spurious renewals.
This approach allows for low overhead lease renewal which scales
well. In the typical case no extra RPC calls are required for lease
renewal and in the worst case one RPC is required every lease period
(i.e. a RENEW operation). The number of locks held by the client is
not a factor since all state for the client is involved with the
lease renewal action.
Since all operations that create a new lease also renew existing
leases, the server must maintain a common lease expiration time for
all valid leases for a given client. This lease time can then be
easily updated upon implicit lease renewal actions.
8.5. Crash Recovery
The important requirement in crash recovery is that both the client
and the server know when the other has failed. Additionally, it is
required that a client sees a consistent view of data across server
restarts or reboots. All READ and WRITE operations that may have
been queued within the client or network buffers must wait until the
client has successfully recovered the locks protecting the READ and
WRITE operations.
8.5.1. Client Failure and Recovery
In the event that a client fails, the server may recover the client's
locks when the associated leases have expired. Conflicting locks
from another client may only be granted after this lease expiration.
If the client is able to restart or reinitialize within the lease
period the client may be forced to wait the remainder of the lease
period before obtaining new locks.
To minimize client delay upon restart, lock requests are associated
with an instance of the client by a client supplied verifier. This
verifier is part of the initial SETCLIENTID call made by the client.
The server returns a clientid as a result of the SETCLIENTID
operation. The client then confirms the use of the clientid with
SETCLIENTID_CONFIRM. The clientid in combination with an opaque
owner field is then used by the client to identify the lock owner for
OPEN. This chain of associations is then used to identify all locks
for a particular client.
Since the verifier will be changed by the client upon each
initialization, the server can compare a new verifier to the verifier
associated with currently held locks and determine that they do not
match. This signifies the client's new instantiation and subsequent
loss of locking state. As a result, the server is free to release
Expires: December 2002 [Page 64]
Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol July 2002
all locks held which are associated with the old clientid which was
derived from the old verifier.
For secure environments, a change in the verifier must only cause the
release of locks associated with the authenticated requester. This
is required to prevent a rogue entity from freeing otherwise valid
locks.
Note that the verifier must have the same uniqueness properties of
the verifier for the COMMIT operation.
8.5.2. Server Failure and Recovery
If the server loses locking state (usually as a result of a restart
or reboot), it must allow clients time to discover this fact and re-
establish the lost locking state. The client must be able to re-
establish the locking state without having the server deny valid
requests because the server has granted conflicting access to another
client. Likewise, if there is the possibility that clients have not
yet re-established their locking state for a file, the server must
disallow READ and WRITE operations for that file. The duration of
this recovery period is equal to the duration of the lease period.
A client can determine that server failure (and thus loss of locking
state) has occurred, when it receives one of two errors. The
NFS4ERR_STALE_STATEID error indicates a stateid invalidated by a
reboot or restart. The NFS4ERR_STALE_CLIENTID error indicates a
clientid invalidated by reboot or restart. When either of these are
received, the client must establish a new clientid (See the section
"Client ID") and re-establish the locking state as discussed below.
The period of special handling of locking and READs and WRITEs, equal
in duration to the lease period, is referred to as the "grace
period". During the grace period, clients recover locks and the
associated state by reclaim-type locking requests (i.e. LOCK requests
with reclaim set to true and OPEN operations with a claim type of
CLAIM_PREVIOUS). During the grace period, the server must reject
READ and WRITE operations and non-reclaim locking requests (i.e.
other LOCK and OPEN operations) with an error of NFS4ERR_GRACE.
If the server can reliably determine that granting a non-reclaim
request will not conflict with reclamation of locks by other clients,
the NFS4ERR_GRACE error does not have to be returned and the non-
reclaim client request can be serviced. For the server to be able to
service READ and WRITE operations during the grace period, it must
again be able to guarantee that no possible conflict could arise
between an impending reclaim locking request and the READ or WRITE
operation. If the server is unable to offer that guarantee, the
NFS4ERR_GRACE error must be returned to the client.
For a server to provide simple, valid handling during the grace
Expires: December 2002 [Page 65]
Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol July 2002
period, the easiest method is to simply reject all non-reclaim
locking requests and READ and WRITE operations by returning the
NFS4ERR_GRACE error. However, a server may keep information about
granted locks in stable storage. With this information, the server
could determine if a regular lock or READ or WRITE operation can be
safely processed.
For example, if a count of locks on a given file is available in
stable storage, the server can track reclaimed locks for the file and
when all reclaims have been processed, non-reclaim locking requests
may be processed. This way the server can ensure that non-reclaim
locking requests will not conflict with potential reclaim requests.
With respect to I/O requests, if the server is able to determine that
there are no outstanding reclaim requests for a file by information
from stable storage or another similar mechanism, the processing of
I/O requests could proceed normally for the file.
To reiterate, for a server that allows non-reclaim lock and I/O
requests to be processed during the grace period, it MUST determine
that no lock subsequently reclaimed will be rejected and that no lock
subsequently reclaimed would have prevented any I/O operation
processed during the grace period.
Clients should be prepared for the return of NFS4ERR_GRACE errors for
non-reclaim lock and I/O requests. In this case the client should
employ a retry mechanism for the request. A delay (on the order of
several seconds) between retries should be used to avoid overwhelming
the server. Further discussion of the general is included in
[Floyd]. The client must account for the server that is able to
perform I/O and non-reclaim locking requests within the grace period
as well as those that can not do so.
A reclaim-type locking request outside the server's grace period can
only succeed if the server can guarantee that no conflicting lock or
I/O request has been granted since reboot or restart.
8.5.3. Network Partitions and Recovery
If the duration of a network partition is greater than the lease
period provided by the server, the server will have not received a
lease renewal from the client. If this occurs, the server may free
all locks held for the client. As a result, all stateids held by the
client will become invalid or stale. Once the client is able to
reach the server after such a network partition, all I/O submitted by
the client with the now invalid stateids will fail with the server
returning the error NFS4ERR_EXPIRED. Once this error is received,
the client will suitably notify the application that held the lock.
As a courtesy to the client or as an optimization, the server may
continue to hold locks on behalf of a client for which recent
communication has extended beyond the lease period. If the server
Expires: December 2002 [Page 66]
Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol July 2002
receives a lock or I/O request that conflicts with one of these
courtesy locks, the server must free the courtesy lock and grant the
new request.
If the server continues to hold locks beyond the expiration of a
client's lease, the server MUST employ a method of recording this
fact in its stable storage. Conflicting locks requests from another
client may be serviced after the lease expiration. There are various
scenarios involving server failure after such an event that require
the storage of these lease expirations or network partitions. One
scenario is as follows:
A client holds a lock at the server and encounters a
network partition and is unable to renew the associated
lease. A second client obtains a conflicting lock and then
frees the lock. After the unlock request by the second
client, the server reboots or reinitializes. Once the
server recovers, the network partition heals and the
original client attempts to reclaim the original lock.
In this scenario and without any state information, the server will
allow the reclaim and the client will be in an inconsistent state
because the server or the client has no knowledge of the conflicting
lock.
The server may choose to store this lease expiration or network
partitioning state in a way that will only identify the client as a
whole. Note that this may potentially lead to lock reclaims being
denied unnecessarily because of a mix of conflicting and non-
conflicting locks. The server may also choose to store information
about each lock that has an expired lease with an associated
conflicting lock. The choice of the amount and type of state
information that is stored is left to the implementor. In any case,
the server must have enough state information to enable correct
recovery from multiple partitions and multiple server failures.
8.6. Recovery from a Lock Request Timeout or Abort
In the event a lock request times out, a client may decide to not
retry the request. The client may also abort the request when the
process for which it was issued is terminated (e.g. in UNIX due to a
signal). It is possible though that the server received the request
and acted upon it. This would change the state on the server without
the client being aware of the change. It is paramount that the
client re-synchronize state with server before it attempts any other
operation that takes a seqid and/or a stateid with the same
nfs_lockowner. This is straightforward to do without a special re-
synchronize operation.
Since the server maintains the last lock request and response
Expires: December 2002 [Page 67]
Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol July 2002
received on the nfs_lockowner, for each nfs_lockowner, the client
should cache the last lock request it sent such that the lock request
did not receive a response. From this, the next time the client does
a lock operation for the nfs_lockowner, it can send the cached
request, if there is one, and if the request was one that established
state (e.g. a LOCK or OPEN operation) the client can follow up with a
request to remove the state (e.g. a LOCKU or CLOSE operation). With
this approach, the sequencing and stateid information on the client
and server for the given nfs_lockowner will re-synchronize and in
turn the lock state will re-synchronize.
8.7. Server Revocation of Locks
At any point, the server can revoke locks held by a client and the
client must be prepared for this event. When the client detects that
its locks have been or may have been revoked, the client is
responsible for validating the state information between itself and
the server. Validating locking state for the client means that it
must verify or reclaim state for each lock currently held.
The first instance of lock revocation is upon server reboot or re-
initialization. In this instance the client will receive an error
(NFS4ERR_STALE_STATEID or NFS4ERR_STALE_CLIENTID) and the client will
proceed with normal crash recovery as described in the previous
section.
The second lock revocation event is the inability to renew the lease
period. While this is considered a rare or unusual event, the client
must be prepared to recover. Both the server and client will be able
to detect the failure to renew the lease and are capable of
recovering without data corruption. For the server, it tracks the
last renewal event serviced for the client and knows when the lease
will expire. Similarly, the client must track operations which will
renew the lease period. Using the time that each such request was
sent and the time that the corresponding reply was received, the
client should bound the time that the corresponding renewal could
have occurred on the server and thus determine if it is possible that
a lease period expiration could have occurred.
The third lock revocation event can occur as a result of
administrative intervention within the lease period. While this is
considered a rare event, it is possible that the server's
administrator has decided to release or revoke a particular lock held
by the client. As a result of revocation, the client will receive an
error of NFS4ERR_EXPIRED and the error is received within the lease
period for the lock. In this instance the client may assume that
only the nfs_lockowner's locks have been lost. The client notifies
the lock holder appropriately. The client may not assume the lease
period has been renewed as a result of failed operation.
When the client determines the lease period may have expired, the
Expires: December 2002 [Page 68]
Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol July 2002
client must mark all locks held for the associated lease as
"unvalidated". This means the client has been unable to re-establish
or confirm the appropriate lock state with the server. As described
in the previous section on crash recovery, there are scenarios in
which the server may grant conflicting locks after the lease period
has expired for a client. When it is possible that the lease period
has expired, the client must validate each lock currently held to
ensure that a conflicting lock has not been granted. The client may
accomplish this task by issuing an I/O request, either a pending I/O
or a zero-length read, specifying the stateid associated with the
lock in question. If the response to the request is success, the
client has validated all of the locks governed by that stateid and
re-established the appropriate state between itself and the server.
If the I/O request is not successful, then one or more of the locks
associated with the stateid was revoked by the server and the client
must notify the owner.
8.8. Share Reservations
A share reservation is a mechanism to control access to a file. It
is a separate and independent mechanism from record locking. When a
client opens a file, it issues an OPEN operation to the server
specifying the type of access required (READ, WRITE, or BOTH) and the
type of access to deny others (deny NONE, READ, WRITE, or BOTH). If
the OPEN fails the client will fail the application's open request.
Pseudo-code definition of the semantics:
if ((request.access & file_state.deny)) ||
(request.deny & file_state.access))
return (NFS4ERR_DENIED)
The constants used for the OPEN and OPEN_DOWNGRADE operations for the
access and deny fields are as follows:
const OPEN4_SHARE_ACCESS_READ = 0x00000001;
const OPEN4_SHARE_ACCESS_WRITE = 0x00000002;
const OPEN4_SHARE_ACCESS_BOTH = 0x00000003;
const OPEN4_SHARE_DENY_NONE = 0x00000000;
const OPEN4_SHARE_DENY_READ = 0x00000001;
const OPEN4_SHARE_DENY_WRITE = 0x00000002;
const OPEN4_SHARE_DENY_BOTH = 0x00000003;
8.9. OPEN/CLOSE Operations
To provide correct share semantics, a client MUST use the OPEN
operation to obtain the initial filehandle and indicate the desired
access and what if any access to deny. Even if the client intends to
Expires: December 2002 [Page 69]
Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol July 2002
use a stateid of all 0's or all 1's, it must still obtain the
filehandle for the regular file with the OPEN operation so the
appropriate share semantics can be applied. For clients that do not
have a deny mode built into their open programming interfaces, deny
equal to NONE should be used.
The OPEN operation with the CREATE flag, also subsumes the CREATE
operation for regular files as used in previous versions of the NFS
protocol. This allows a create with a share to be done atomically.
The CLOSE operation removes all share locks held by the nfs_lockowner
on that file. If record locks are held, the client SHOULD release
all locks before issuing a CLOSE. The server MAY free all
outstanding locks on CLOSE but some servers may not support the CLOSE
of a file that still has record locks held. The server MUST return
failure if any locks would exist after the CLOSE.
The LOOKUP operation will return a filehandle without establishing
any lock state on the server. Without a valid stateid, the server
will assume the client has the least access. For example, a file
opened with deny READ/WRITE cannot be accessed using a filehandle
obtained through LOOKUP because it would not have a valid stateid
(i.e. using a stateid of all bits 0 or all bits 1).
8.10. Open Upgrade and Downgrade
When an OPEN is done for a file and the lockowner for which the open
is being done already has the file open, the result is to upgrade the
open file status maintained on the server to include the access and
deny bits specified by the new OPEN as well as those for the existing
OPEN. The result is that there is one open file, as far as the
protocol is concerned, and it includes the union of the access and
deny bits for all of the OPEN requests completed. Only a single
CLOSE will be done to reset the effects of both OPEN's. Note that
the client, when issuing the OPEN, may not know that the same file is
in fact being opened. The above only applies if both OPEN's result
in the OPEN'ed object being designated by the same filehandle.
When the server chooses to export multiple filehandles corresponding
to the same file object and returns different filehandles on two
different OPEN's of the same file object, the server MUST NOT "OR"
together the access and deny bits and coalesce the two open files.
Instead the server must maintain separate OPEN's with separate
stateid's and will require separate CLOSE's to free them.
When multiple open files on the client are merged into a single open
file object on the server, the close of one of the open files (on the
client) may necessitate change of the access and deny status of the
open file on the server. This is because the union of the access and
deny bits for the remaining open's may be smaller (i.e. a proper
subset) than previously. The OPEN_DOWNGRADE operation is used to
Expires: December 2002 [Page 70]
Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol July 2002
make the necessary change and the client should use it to update the
server so that share reservation requests by other clients are
handled properly.
8.11. Short and Long Leases
When determining the time period for the server lease, the usual
lease tradeoffs apply. Short leases are good for fast server
recovery at a cost of increased RENEW or READ (with zero length)
requests. Longer leases are certainly kinder and gentler to large
internet servers trying to handle very large numbers of clients. The
number of RENEW requests drop in proportion to the lease time. The
disadvantages of long leases are slower recovery after server failure
(server must wait for leases to expire and grace period before
granting new lock requests) and increased file contention (if client
fails to transmit an unlock request then server must wait for lease
expiration before granting new locks).
Long leases are usable if the server is able to store lease state in
non-volatile memory. Upon recovery, the server can reconstruct the
lease state from its non-volatile memory and continue operation with
its clients and therefore long leases are not an issue.
8.12. Clocks and Calculating Lease Expiration
To avoid the need for synchronized clocks, lease times are granted by
the server as a time delta. However, there is a requirement that the
client and server clocks do not drift excessively over the duration
of the lock. There is also the issue of propagation delay across the
network which could easily be several hundred milliseconds as well as
the possibility that requests will be lost and need to be
retransmitted.
To take propagation delay into account, the client should subtract it
from lease times (e.g. if the client estimates the one-way
propagation delay as 200 msec, then it can assume that the lease is
already 200 msec old when it gets it). In addition, it will take
another 200 msec to get a response back to the server. So the client
must send a lock renewal or write data back to the server 400 msec
before the lease would expire.
8.13. Migration, Replication and State
When responsibility for handling a given file system is transferred
to a new server (migration) or the client chooses to use an alternate
server (e.g. in response to server unresponsiveness) in the context
of file system replication, the appropriate handling of state shared
between the client and server (i.e. locks, leases, stateid's, and
Expires: December 2002 [Page 71]
Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol July 2002
clientid's) is as described below. The handling differs between
migration and replication. For related discussion of file server
state and recover of such see the sections under "File Locking and
Share Reservations"
8.13.1. Migration and State
In the case of migration, the servers involved in the migration of a
file system SHOULD transfer all server state from the original to the
new server. This must be done in a way that is transparent to the
client. This state transfer will ease the client's transition when a
file system migration occurs. If the servers are successful in
transferring all state, the client will continue to use stateid's
assigned by the original server. Therefore the new server must
recognize these stateid's as valid. This holds true for the clientid
as well. Since responsibility for an entire file system is
transferred with a migration event, there is no possibility that
conflicts will arise on the new server as a result of the transfer of
locks.
As part of the transfer of information between servers, leases would
be transferred as well. The leases being transferred to the new
server will typically have a different expiration time from those for
the same client, previously on the new server. To maintain the
property that all leases on a given server for a given client expire
at the same time, the server should advance the expiration time to
the later of the leases being transferred or the leases already
present. This allows the client to maintain lease renewal of both
classes without special effort.
The servers may choose not to transfer the state information upon
migration. However, this choice is discouraged. In this case, when
the client presents state information from the original server, the
client must be prepared to receive either NFS4ERR_STALE_CLIENTID or
NFS4ERR_STALE_STATEID from the new server. The client should then
recover its state information as it normally would in response to a
server failure. The new server must take care to allow for the
recovery of state information as it would in the event of server
restart.
8.13.2. Replication and State
Since client switch-over in the case of replication is not under
server control, the handling of state is different. In this case,
leases, stateid's and clientid's do not have validity across a
transition from one server to another. The client must re-establish
its locks on the new server. This can be compared to the re-
establishment of locks by means of reclaim-type requests after a
server reboot. The difference is that the server has no provision to
distinguish requests reclaiming locks from those obtaining new locks
Expires: December 2002 [Page 72]
Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol July 2002
or to defer the latter. Thus, a client re-establishing a lock on the
new server (by means of a LOCK or OPEN request), may have the
requests denied due to a conflicting lock. Since replication is
intended for read-only use of filesystems, such denial of locks
should not pose large difficulties in practice. When an attempt to
re-establish a lock on a new server is denied, the client should
treat the situation as if his original lock had been revoked.
8.13.3. Notification of Migrated Lease
In the case of lease renewal, the client may not be submitting
requests for a file system that has been migrated to another server.
This can occur because of the implicit lease renewal mechanism. The
client renews leases for all file systems when submitting a request
to any one file system at the server.
In order for the client to schedule renewal of leases that may have
been relocated to the new server, the client must find out about
lease relocation before those leases expire. To accomplish this, all
operations which implicitly renew leases for a client (i.e. OPEN,
CLOSE, READ, WRITE, RENEW, LOCK, LOCKT, LOCKU), will return the error
NFS4ERR_LEASE_MOVED if responsibility for any of the leases to be
renewed has been transferred to a new server. This condition will
continue until the client receives an NFS4ERR_MOVED error and the
server receives the subsequent GETATTR(fs_locations) for an access to
each file system for which a lease has been moved to a new server.
When a client receives an NFS4ERR_LEASE_MOVED error, it should
perform some operation, such as a RENEW, on each file system
associated with the server in question. When the client receives an
NFS4ERR_MOVED error, the client can follow the normal process to
obtain the new server information (through the fs_locations
attribute) and perform renewal of those leases on the new server. If
the server has not had state transferred to it transparently, it will
receive either NFS4ERR_STALE_CLIENTID or NFS4ERR_STALE_STATEID from
the new server, as described above, and can then recover state
information as it does in the event of server failure.
Expires: December 2002 [Page 73]
Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol July 2002
9. Client-Side Caching
Client-side caching of data, of file attributes, and of file names is
essential to providing good performance with the NFS protocol.
Providing distributed cache coherence is a difficult problem and
previous versions of the NFS protocol have not attempted it.
Instead, several NFS client implementation techniques have been used
to reduce the problems that a lack of coherence poses for users.
These techniques have not been clearly defined by earlier protocol
specifications and it is often unclear what is valid or invalid
client behavior.
The NFS version 4 protocol uses many techniques similar to those that
have been used in previous protocol versions. The NFS version 4
protocol does not provide distributed cache coherence. However, it
defines a more limited set of caching guarantees to allow locks and
share reservations to be used without destructive interference from
client side caching.
In addition, the NFS version 4 protocol introduces a delegation
mechanism which allows many decisions normally made by the server to
be made locally by clients. This mechanism provides efficient
support of the common cases where sharing is infrequent or where
sharing is read-only.
9.1. Performance Challenges for Client-Side Caching
Caching techniques used in previous versions of the NFS protocol have
been successful in providing good performance. However, several
scalability challenges can arise when those techniques are used with
very large numbers of clients. This is particularly true when
clients are geographically distributed which classically increases
the latency for cache revalidation requests.
The previous versions of the NFS protocol repeat their file data
cache validation requests at the time the file is opened. This
behavior can have serious performance drawbacks. A common case is
one in which a file is only accessed by a single client. Therefore,
sharing is infrequent.
In this case, repeated reference to the server to find that no
conflicts exist is expensive. A better option with regards to
performance is to allow a client that repeatedly opens a file to do
so without reference to the server. This is done until potentially
conflicting operations from another client actually occur.
A similar situation arises in connection with file locking. Sending
file lock and unlock requests to the server as well as the read and
write requests necessary to make data caching consistent with the
locking semantics (see the section "Data Caching and File Locking")
can severely limit performance. When locking is used to provide
Expires: December 2002 [Page 74]
Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol July 2002
protection against infrequent conflicts, a large penalty is incurred.
This penalty may discourage the use of file locking by applications.
The NFS version 4 protocol provides more aggressive caching
strategies with the following design goals:
o Compatibility with a large range of server semantics.
o Provide the same caching benefits as previous versions of the
NFS protocol when unable to provide the more aggressive model.
o Requirements for aggressive caching are organized so that a
large portion of the benefit can be obtained even when not all
of the requirements can be met.
The appropriate requirements for the server are discussed in later
sections in which specific forms of caching are covered. (see the
section "Open Delegation").
9.2. Delegation and Callbacks
Recallable delegation of server responsibilities for a file to a
client improves performance by avoiding repeated requests to the
server in the absence of inter-client conflict. With the use of a
"callback" RPC from server to client, a server recalls delegated
responsibilities when another client engages in sharing of a
delegated file.
A delegation is passed from the server to the client, specifying the
object of the delegation and the type of delegation. There are
different types of delegations but each type contains a stateid to be
used to represent the delegation when performing operations that
depend on the delegation. This stateid is similar to those
associated with locks and share reservations but differs in that the
stateid for a delegation is associated with a clientid and may be
used on behalf of all the nfs_lockowners for the given client. A
delegation is made to the client as a whole and not to any specific
process or thread of control within it.
Because callback RPCs may not work in all environments (due to
firewalls, for example), correct protocol operation does not depend
on them. Preliminary testing of callback functionality by means of a
CB_NULL procedure determines whether callbacks can be supported. The
CB_NULL procedure checks the continuity of the callback path. A
server makes a preliminary assessment of callback availability to a
given client and avoids delegating responsibilities until it has
determined that callbacks are supported. Because the granting of a
delegation is always conditional upon the absence of conflicting
access, clients must not assume that a delegation will be granted and
they must always be prepared for OPENs to be processed without any
Expires: December 2002 [Page 75]
Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol July 2002
delegations being granted.
Once granted, a delegation behaves in most ways like a lock. There
is an associated lease that is subject to renewal together with all
of the other leases held by that client.
Unlike locks, an operation by a second client to a delegated file
will cause the server to recall a delegation through a callback.
On recall, the client holding the delegation must flush modified
state (such as modified data) to the server and return the
delegation. The conflicting request will not receive a response
until the recall is complete. The recall is considered complete when
the client returns the delegation or the server times out on the
recall and revokes the delegation as a result of the timeout.
Following the resolution of the recall, the server has the
information necessary to grant or deny the second client's request.
At the time the client receives a delegation recall, it may have
substantial state that needs to be flushed to the server. Therefore,
the server should allow sufficient time for the delegation to be
returned since it may involve numerous RPCs to the server. If the
server is able to determine that the client is diligently flushing
state to the server as a result of the recall, the server may extend
the usual time allowed for a recall. However, the time allowed for
recall completion should not be unbounded.
An example of this is when responsibility to mediate opens on a given
file is delegated to a client (see the section "Open Delegation").
The server will not know what opens are in effect on the client.
Without this knowledge the server will be unable to determine if the
access and deny state for the file allows any particular open until
the delegation for the file has been returned.
A client failure or a network partition can result in failure to
respond to a recall callback. In this case, the server will revoke
the delegation which in turn will render useless any modified state
still on the client.
9.2.1. Delegation Recovery
There are three situations that delegation recovery must deal with:
o Client reboot or restart
o Server reboot or restart
o Network partition (full or callback-only)
In the event the client reboots or restarts, the failure to renew
Expires: December 2002 [Page 76]
Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol July 2002
leases will result in the revocation of record locks and share
reservations. Delegations, however, may be treated a bit
differently.
There will be situations in which delegations will need to be
reestablished after a client reboots or restarts. The reason for
this is the client may have file data stored locally and this data
was associated with the previously held delegations. The client will
need to reestablish the appropriate file state on the server.
To allow for this type of client recovery, the server may extend the
period for delegation recovery beyond the typical lease expiration
period. This implies that requests from other clients that conflict
with these delegations will need to wait. Because the normal recall
process may require significant time for the client to flush changed
state to the server, other clients need be prepared for delays that
occur because of a conflicting delegation. This longer interval
would increase the window for clients to reboot and consult stable
storage so that the delegations can be reclaimed. For open
delegations, such delegations are reclaimed using OPEN with a claim
type of CLAIM_DELEGATE_PREV. (See the sections on "Data Caching and
Revocation" and "Operation 18: OPEN" for discussion of open
delegation and the details of OPEN respectively).
When the server reboots or restarts, delegations are reclaimed (using
the OPEN operation with CLAIM_DELEGATE_PREV) in a similar fashion to
record locks and share reservations. However, there is a slight
semantic difference. In the normal case if the server decides that a
delegation should not be granted, it performs the requested action
(e.g. OPEN) without granting any delegation. For reclaim, the server
grants the delegation but a special designation is applied so that
the client treats the delegation as having been granted but recalled
by the server. Because of this, the client has the duty to write all
modified state to the server and then return the delegation. This
process of handling delegation reclaim reconciles three principles of
the NFS Version 4 protocol:
o Upon reclaim, a client reporting resources assigned to it by an
earlier server instance must be granted those resources.
o The server has unquestionable authority to determine whether
delegations are to be granted and, once granted, whether they
are to be continued.
o The use of callbacks is not to be depended upon until the client
has proven its ability to receive them.
When a network partition occurs, delegations are subject to freeing
by the server when the lease renewal period expires. This is similar
to the behavior for locks and share reservations. For delegations,
however, the server may extend the period in which conflicting
Expires: December 2002 [Page 77]
Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol July 2002
requests are held off. Eventually the occurrence of a conflicting
request from another client will cause revocation of the delegation.
A loss of the callback path (e.g. by later network configuration
change) will have the same effect. A recall request will fail and
revocation of the delegation will result.
A client normally finds out about revocation of a delegation when it
uses a stateid associated with a delegation and receives the error
NFS4ERR_EXPIRED. It also may find out about delegation revocation
after a client reboot when it attempts to reclaim a delegation and
receives that same error. Note that in the case of a revoked write
open delegation, there are issues because data may have been modified
by the client whose delegation is revoked and separately by other
clients. See the section "Revocation Recovery for Write Open
Delegation" for a discussion of such issues. Note also that when
delegations are revoked, information about the revoked delegation
will be written by the server to stable storage (as described in the
section "Crash Recovery"). This is done to deal with the case in
which a server reboots after revoking a delegation but before the
client holding the revoked delegation is notified about the
revocation.
9.3. Data Caching
When applications share access to a set of files, they need to be
implemented so as to take account of the possibility of conflicting
access by another application. This is true whether the applications
in question execute on different clients or reside on the same
client.
Share reservations and record locks are the facilities the NFS
version 4 protocol provides to allow applications to coordinate
access by providing mutual exclusion facilities. The NFS version 4
protocol's data caching must be implemented such that it does not
invalidate the assumptions that those using these facilities depend
upon.
9.3.1. Data Caching and OPENs
In order to avoid invalidating the sharing assumptions that
applications rely on, NFS version 4 clients should not provide cached
data to applications or modify it on behalf of an application when it
would not be valid to obtain or modify that same data via a READ or
WRITE operation.
Furthermore, in the absence of open delegation (see the section "Open
Delegation") two additional rules apply. Note that these rules are
obeyed in practice by many NFS version 2 and version 3 clients.
o First, cached data present on a client must be revalidated after
Expires: December 2002 [Page 78]
Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol July 2002
doing an OPEN. This is to ensure that the data for the OPENed
file is still correctly reflected in the client's cache. This
validation must be done at least when the client's OPEN
operation includes DENY=WRITE or BOTH thus terminating a period
in which other clients may have had the opportunity to open the
file with WRITE access. Clients may choose to do the
revalidation more often (i.e. at OPENs specifying DENY=NONE) to
parallel the NFS version 3 protocol's practice for the benefit
of users assuming this degree of cache revalidation.
o Second, modified data must be flushed to the server before
closing a file OPENed for write. This is complementary to the
first rule. If the data is not flushed at CLOSE, the
revalidation done after client OPENs as file is unable to
achieve its purpose. The other aspect to flushing the data
before close is that the data must be committed to stable
storage, at the server, before the CLOSE operation is requested
by the client. In the case of a server reboot or restart and a
CLOSEd file, it may not be possible to retransmit the data to be
written to the file. Hence, this requirement.
9.3.2. Data Caching and File Locking
For those applications that choose to use file locking instead of
share reservations to exclude inconsistent file access, there is an
analogous set of constraints that apply to client side data caching.
These rules are effective only if the file locking is used in a way
that matches in an equivalent way the actual READ and WRITE
operations executed. This is as opposed to file locking that is
based on pure convention. For example, it is possible to manipulate
a two-megabyte file by dividing the file into two one-megabyte
regions and protecting access to the two regions by file locks on
bytes zero and one. A lock for write on byte zero of the file would
represent the right to do READ and WRITE operations on the first
region. A lock for write on byte one of the file would represent the
right to do READ and WRITE operations on the second region. As long
as all applications manipulating the file obey this convention, they
will work on a local file system. However, they may not work with
the NFS version 4 protocol unless clients refrain from data caching.
The rules for data caching in the file locking environment are:
o First, when a client obtains a file lock for a particular
region, the data cache corresponding to that region (if any
cache data exists) must be revalidated. If the change attribute
indicates that the file may have been updated since the cached
data was obtained, the client must flush or invalidate the
cached data for the newly locked region. A client might choose
to invalidate all of non-modified cached data that it has for
the file but the only requirement for correct operation is to
invalidate all of the data in the newly locked region.
Expires: December 2002 [Page 79]
Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol July 2002
o Second, before releasing a write lock for a region, all modified
data for that region must be flushed to the server. The
modified data must also be written to stable storage.
Note that flushing data to the server and the invalidation of cached
data must reflect the actual byte ranges locked or unlocked.
Rounding these up or down to reflect client cache block boundaries
will cause problems if not carefully done. For example, writing a
modified block when only half of that block is within an area being
unlocked may cause invalid modification to the region outside the
unlocked area. This, in turn, may be part of a region locked by
another client. Clients can avoid this situation by synchronously
performing portions of write operations that overlap that portion
(initial or final) that is not a full block. Similarly, invalidating
a locked area which is not an integral number of full buffer blocks
would require the client to read one or two partial blocks from the
server if the revalidation procedure shows that the data which the
client possesses may not be valid.
The data that is written to the server as a pre-requisite to the
unlocking of a region must be written, at the server, to stable
storage. The client may accomplish this either with synchronous
writes or by following asynchronous writes with a COMMIT operation.
This is required because retransmission of the modified data after a
server reboot might conflict with a lock held by another client.
A client implementation may choose to accommodate applications which
use record locking in non-standard ways (e.g. using a record lock as
a global semaphore) by flushing to the server more data upon an LOCKU
than is covered by the locked range. This may include modified data
within files other than the one for which the unlocks are being done.
In such cases, the client must not interfere with applications whose
READs and WRITEs are being done only within the bounds of record
locks which the application holds. For example, an application locks
a single byte of a file and proceeds to write that single byte. A
client that chose to handle a LOCKU by flushing all modified data to
the server could validly write that single byte in response to an
unrelated unlock. However, it would not be valid to write the entire
block in which that single written byte was located since it includes
an area that is not locked and might be locked by another client.
Client implementations can avoid this problem by dividing files with
modified data into those for which all modifications are done to
areas covered by an appropriate record lock and those for which there
are modifications not covered by a record lock. Any writes done for
the former class of files must not include areas not locked and thus
not modified on the client.
9.3.3. Data Caching and Mandatory File Locking
Client side data caching needs to respect mandatory file locking when
it is in effect. The presence of mandatory file locking for a given
Expires: December 2002 [Page 80]
Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol July 2002
file is indicated in the result flags for an OPEN. When mandatory
locking is in effect for a file, the client must check for an
appropriate file lock for data being read or written. If a lock
exists for the range being read or written, the client may satisfy
the request using the client's validated cache. If an appropriate
file lock is not held for the range of the read or write, the read or
write request must not be satisfied by the client's cache and the
request must be sent to the server for processing. When a read or
write request partially overlaps a locked region, the request should
be subdivided into multiple pieces with each region (locked or not)
treated appropriately.
9.3.4. Data Caching and File Identity
When clients cache data, the file data needs to organized according
to the file system object to which the data belongs. For NFS version
3 clients, the typical practice has been to assume for the purpose of
caching that distinct filehandles represent distinct file system
objects. The client then has the choice to organize and maintain the
data cache on this basis.
In the NFS version 4 protocol, there is now the possibility to have
significant deviations from a "one filehandle per object" model
because a filehandle may be constructed on the basis of the object's
pathname. Therefore, clients need a reliable method to determine if
two filehandles designate the same file system object. If clients
were simply to assume that all distinct filehandles denote distinct
objects and proceed to do data caching on this basis, caching
inconsistencies would arise between the distinct client side objects
which mapped to the same server side object.
By providing a method to differentiate filehandles, the NFS version 4
protocol alleviates a potential functional regression in comparison
with the NFS version 3 protocol. Without this method, caching
inconsistencies within the same client could occur and this has not
been present in previous versions of the NFS protocol. Note that it
is possible to have such inconsistencies with applications executing
on multiple clients but that is not the issue being addressed here.
For the purposes of data caching, the following steps allow an NFS
version 4 client to determine whether two distinct filehandles denote
the same server side object:
o If GETATTR directed to two filehandles have different values of
the fsid attribute, then the filehandles represent distinct
objects.
o If GETATTR for any file with an fsid that matches the fsid of
the two filehandles in question returns a unique_handles
attribute with a value of TRUE, then the two objects are
Expires: December 2002 [Page 81]
Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol July 2002
distinct.
o If GETATTR directed to the two filehandles does not return the
fileid attribute for one or both of the handles, then it cannot
be determined whether the two objects are the same. Therefore,
operations which depend on that knowledge (e.g. client side data
caching) cannot be done reliably.
o If GETATTR directed to the two filehandles returns different
values for the fileid attribute, then they are distinct objects.
o Otherwise they are the same object.
9.4. Open Delegation
When a file is being OPENed, the server may delegate further handling
of opens and closes for that file to the opening client. Any such
delegation is recallable, since the circumstances that allowed for
the delegation are subject to change. In particular, the server may
receive a conflicting OPEN from another client, the server must
recall the delegation before deciding whether the OPEN from the other
client may be granted. Making a delegation is up to the server and
clients should not assume that any particular OPEN either will or
will not result in an open delegation. The following is a typical
set of conditions that servers might use in deciding whether OPEN
should be delegated:
o The client must be able to respond to the server's callback
requests. The server will use the CB_NULL procedure for a test
of callback ability.
o The client must have responded properly to previous recalls.
o There must be no current open conflicting with the requested
delegation.
o There should be no current delegation that conflicts with the
delegation being requested.
o The probability of future conflicting open requests should be
low based on the recent history of the file.
o The existence of any server-specific semantics of OPEN/CLOSE
that would make the required handling incompatible with the
prescribed handling that the delegated client would apply (see
below).
There are two types of open delegations, read and write. A read open
delegation allows a client to handle, on its own, requests to open a
file for reading that do not deny read access to others. Multiple
read open delegations may be outstanding simultaneously and do not
Expires: December 2002 [Page 82]
Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol July 2002
conflict. A write open delegation allows the client to handle, on
its own, all opens. Only one write open delegation may exist for a
given file at a given time and it is inconsistent with any read open
delegations.
When a client has a read open delegation, it may not make any changes
to the contents or attributes of the file but it is assured that no
other client may do so. When a client has a write open delegation,
it may modify the file data since no other client will be accessing
the file's data. The client holding a write delegation may only
affect file attributes which are intimately connected with the file
data: size, time_modify, change.
When a client has an open delegation, it does not send OPENs or
CLOSEs to the server but updates the appropriate status internally.
For a read open delegation, opens that cannot be handled locally
(opens for write or that deny read access) must be sent to the
server.
When an open delegation is made, the response to the OPEN contains an
open delegation structure which specifies the following:
o the type of delegation (read or write)
o space limitation information to control flushing of data on
close (write open delegation only, see the section "Open
Delegation and Data Caching")
o an nfsace4 specifying read and write permissions
o a stateid to represent the delegation for READ and WRITE
The stateid is separate and distinct from the stateid for the OPEN
proper. The standard stateid, unlike the delegation stateid, is
associated with a particular nfs_lockowner and will continue to be
valid after the delegation is recalled and the file remains open.
When a request internal to the client is made to open a file and open
delegation is in effect, it will be accepted or rejected solely on
the basis of the following conditions. Any requirement for other
checks to be made by the delegate should result in open delegation
being denied so that the checks can be made by the server itself.
o The access and deny bits for the request and the file as
described in the section "Share Reservations".
o The read and write permissions as determined below.
The nfsace4 passed with delegation can be used to avoid frequent
ACCESS calls. The permission check should be as follows:
Expires: December 2002 [Page 83]
Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol July 2002
o If the nfsace4 indicates that the open may be done, then it
should be granted without reference to the server.
o If the nfsace4 indicates that the open may not be done, then an
ACCESS request must be sent to the server to obtain the
definitive answer.
The server may return an nfsace4 that is more restrictive than the
actual ACL of the file. This includes an nfsace4 that specifies
denial of all access. Note that some common practices such as
mapping the traditional user "root" to the user "nobody" may make it
incorrect to return the actual ACL of the file in the delegation
response.
The use of delegation together with various other forms of caching
creates the possibility that no server authentication will ever be
performed for a given user since all of the user's requests might be
satisfied locally. Where the client is depending on the server for
authentication, the client should be sure authentication occurs for
each user by use of the ACCESS operation. This should be the case
even if an ACCESS operation would not be required otherwise. As
mentioned before, the server may enforce frequent authentication by
returning an nfsace4 denying all access with every open delegation.
9.4.1. Open Delegation and Data Caching
OPEN delegation allows much of the message overhead associated with
the opening and closing files to be eliminated. An open when an open
delegation is in effect does not require that a validation message be
sent to the server. The continued endurance of the "read open
delegation" provides a guarantee that no OPEN for write and thus no
write has occurred. Similarly, when closing a file opened for write
and if write open delegation is in effect, the data written does not
have to be flushed to the server until the open delegation is
recalled. The continued endurance of the open delegation provides a
guarantee that no open and thus no read or write has been done by
another client.
For the purposes of open delegation, READs and WRITEs done without an
OPEN are treated as the functional equivalents of a corresponding
type of OPEN. This refers to the READs and WRITEs that use the
special stateids consisting of all zero bits or all one bits.
Therefore, READs or WRITEs with a special stateid done by another
client will force the server to recall a write open delegation. A
WRITE with a special stateid done by another client will force a
recall of read open delegations.
With delegations, a client is able to avoid writing data to the
server when the CLOSE of a file is serviced. The CLOSE operation is
the usual point at which the client is notified of a lack of stable
storage for the modified file data generated by the application. At
Expires: December 2002 [Page 84]
Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol July 2002
the CLOSE, file data is written to the server and through normal
accounting the server is able to determine if the available file
system space for the data has been exceeded (i.e. server returns
NFS4ERR_NOSPC or NFS4ERR_DQUOT). This accounting includes quotas.
The introduction of delegations requires that a alternative method be
in place for the same type of communication to occur between client
and server.
In the delegation response, the server provides either the limit of
the size of the file or the number of modified blocks and associated
block size. The server must ensure that the client will be able to
flush data to the server of a size equal to that provided in the
original delegation. The server must make this assurance for all
outstanding delegations. Therefore, the server must be careful in
its management of available space for new or modified data taking
into account available file system space and any applicable quotas.
The server can recall delegations as a result of managing the
available file system space. The client should abide by the server's
state space limits for delegations. If the client exceeds the stated
limits for the delegation, the server's behavior is undefined.
Based on server conditions, quotas or available file system space,
the server may grant write open delegations with very restrictive
space limitations. The limitations may be defined in a way that will
always force modified data to be flushed to the server on close.
With respect to authentication, flushing modified data to the server
after a CLOSE has occurred may be problematic. For example, the user
of the application may have logged off of the client and unexpired
authentication credentials may not be present. In this case, the
client may need to take special care to ensure that local unexpired
credentials will in fact be available. This may be accomplished by
tracking the expiration time of credentials and flushing data well in
advance of their expiration or by making private copies of
credentials to assure their availability when needed.
9.4.2. Open Delegation and File Locks
When a client holds a write open delegation, lock operations are
performed locally. This includes those required for mandatory file
locking. This can be done since the delegation implies that there
can be no conflicting locks. Similarly, all of the revalidations
that would normally be associated with obtaining locks and the
flushing of data associated with the releasing of locks need not be
done.
9.4.3. Recall of Open Delegation
The following events necessitate recall of an open delegation:
Expires: December 2002 [Page 85]
Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol July 2002
o Potentially conflicting OPEN request (or READ/WRITE done with
"special" stateid)
o SETATTR issued by another client
o REMOVE request for the file
o RENAME request for the file as either source or target of the
RENAME
Whether a RENAME of a directory in the path leading to the file
results in recall of an open delegation depends on the semantics of
the server file system. If that file system denies such RENAMEs when
a file is open, the recall must be performed to determine whether the
file in question is, in fact, open.
In addition to the situations above, the server may choose to recall
open delegations at any time if resource constraints make it
advisable to do so. Clients should always be prepared for the
possibility of recall.
The server needs to employ special handling for a GETATTR where the
target is a file that has a write open delegation in effect. In this
case, the client holding the delegation needs to be interrogated.
The server will use a CB_GETATTR callback, if the GETATTR attribute
bits include any of the attributes that a write open delegate may
modify (size, time_modify, change).
When a client receives a recall for an open delegation, it needs to
update state on the server before returning the delegation. These
same updates must be done whenever a client chooses to return a
delegation voluntarily. The following items of state need to be
dealt with:
o If the file associated with the delegation is no longer open and
no previous CLOSE operation has been sent to the server, a CLOSE
operation must be sent to the server.
o If a file has other open references at the client, then OPEN
operations must be sent to the server. The appropriate stateids
will be provided by the server for subsequent use by the client
since the delegation stateid will not longer be valid. These
OPEN requests are done with the claim type of
CLAIM_DELEGATE_CUR. This will allow the presentation of the
delegation stateid so that the client can establish the
appropriate rights to perform the OPEN. (see the section
"Operation 18: OPEN" for details.)
o If there are granted file locks, the corresponding LOCK
operations need to be performed. This applies to the write open
delegation case only.
Expires: December 2002 [Page 86]
Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol July 2002
o For a write open delegation, if at the time of recall the file
is not open for write, all modified data for the file must be
flushed to the server. If the delegation had not existed, the
client would have done this data flush before the CLOSE
operation.
o For a write open delegation when a file is still open at the
time of recall, any modified data for the file needs to be
flushed to the server.
o With the write open delegation in place, it is possible that the
file was truncated during the duration of the delegation. For
example, the truncation could have occurred as a result of an
OPEN UNCHECKED with a size attribute value of zero. Therefore,
if a truncation of the file has occurred and this operation has
not been propagated to the server, the truncation must occur
before any modified data is written to the server.
In the case of write open delegation, file locking imposes some
additional requirements. The flushing of any modified data in any
region for which a write lock was released while the write open
delegation was in effect is what is required to precisely maintain
the associated invariant. However, because the write open delegation
implies no other locking by other clients, a simpler implementation
is to flush all modified data for the file (as described just above)
if any write lock has been released while the write open delegation
was in effect.
9.4.4. Delegation Revocation
At the point a delegation is revoked, if there are associated opens
on the client, the applications holding these opens need to be
notified. This notification usually occurs by returning errors for
READ/WRITE operations or when a close is attempted for the open file.
If no opens exist for the file at the point the delegation is
revoked, then notification of the revocation is unnecessary.
However, if there is modified data present at the client for the
file, the user of the application should be notified. Unfortunately,
it may not be possible to notify the user since active applications
may not be present at the client. See the section "Revocation
Recovery for Write Open Delegation" for additional details.
9.5. Data Caching and Revocation
When locks and delegations are revoked, the assumptions upon which
successful caching depend are no longer guaranteed. The owner of the
locks or share reservations which have been revoked needs to be
notified. This notification includes applications with a file open
that has a corresponding delegation which has been revoked. Cached
Expires: December 2002 [Page 87]
Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol July 2002
data associated with the revocation must be removed from the client.
In the case of modified data existing in the client's cache, that
data must be removed from the client without it being written to the
server. As mentioned, the assumptions made by the client are no
longer valid at the point when a lock or delegation has been revoked.
For example, another client may have been granted a conflicting lock
after the revocation of the lock at the first client. Therefore, the
data within the lock range may have been modified by the other
client. Obviously, the first client is unable to guarantee to the
application what has occurred to the file in the case of revocation.
Notification to a lock owner will in many cases consist of simply
returning an error on the next and all subsequent READs/WRITEs to the
open file or on the close. Where the methods available to a client
make such notification impossible because errors for certain
operations may not be returned, more drastic action such as signals
or process termination may be appropriate. The justification for
this is that an invariant for which an application depends on may be
violated. Depending on how errors are typically treated for the
client operating environment, further levels of notification
including logging, console messages, and GUI pop-ups may be
appropriate.
9.5.1. Revocation Recovery for Write Open Delegation
Revocation recovery for a write open delegation poses the special
issue of modified data in the client cache while the file is not
open. In this situation, any client which does not flush modified
data to the server on each close must ensure that the user receives
appropriate notification of the failure as a result of the
revocation. Since such situations may require human action to
correct problems, notification schemes in which the appropriate user
or administrator is notified may be necessary. Logging and console
messages are typical examples.
If there is modified data on the client, it must not be flushed
normally to the server. A client may attempt to provide a copy of
the file data as modified during the delegation under a different
name in the file system name space to ease recovery. Unless the
client can determine that the file has not modified by any other
client, this technique must be limited to situations in which a
client has a complete cached copy of the file in question. Use of
such a technique may be limited to files under a certain size or may
only be used when sufficient disk space is guaranteed to be available
within the target file system and when the client has sufficient
buffering resources to keep the cached copy available until it is
properly stored to the target file system.
Expires: December 2002 [Page 88]
Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol July 2002
9.6. Attribute Caching
The attributes discussed in this section do not include named
attributes. Individual named attributes are analogous to files and
caching of the data for these needs to be handled just as data
caching is for ordinary files. Similarly, LOOKUP results from an
OPENATTR directory are to be cached on the same basis as any other
pathnames and similarly for directory contents.
Clients may cache file attributes obtained from the server and use
them to avoid subsequent GETATTR requests. Such caching is write
through in that modification to file attributes is always done by
means of requests to the server and should not be done locally and
cached. The exception to this are modifications to attributes that
are intimately connected with data caching. Therefore, extending a
file by writing data to the local data cache is reflected immediately
in the size as seen on the client without this change being
immediately reflected on the server. Normally such changes are not
propagated directly to the server but when the modified data is
flushed to the server, analogous attribute changes are made on the
server. When open delegation is in effect, the modified attributes
may be returned to the server in the response to a CB_RECALL call.
The result of local caching of attributes is that the attribute
caches maintained on individual clients will not be coherent. Changes
made in one order on the server may be seen in a different order on
one client and in a third order on a different client.
The typical file system application programming interfaces do not
provide means to atomically modify or interrogate attributes for
multiple files at the same time. The following rules provide an
environment where the potential incoherences mentioned above can be
reasonably managed. These rules are derived from the practice of
previous NFS protocols.
o All attributes for a given file (per-fsid attributes excepted)
are cached as a unit at the client so that no non-
serializability can arise within the context of a single file.
o An upper time boundary is maintained on how long a client cache
entry can be kept without being refreshed from the server.
o When operations are performed that change attributes at the
server, the updated attribute set is requested as part of the
containing RPC. This includes directory operations that update
attributes indirectly. This is accomplished by following the
modifying operation with a GETATTR operation and then using the
results of the GETATTR to update the client's cached attributes.
Note that if the full set of attributes to be cached is requested by
READDIR, the results can be cached by the client on the same basis as
attributes obtained via GETATTR.
Expires: December 2002 [Page 89]
Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol July 2002
A client may validate its cached version of attributes for a file by
fetching only the change attribute and assuming that if the change
attribute has the same value as it did when the attributes were
cached, then no attributes have changed. The possible exception is
the attribute time_access.
9.7. Name Caching
The results of LOOKUP and READDIR operations may be cached to avoid
the cost of subsequent LOOKUP operations. Just as in the case of
attribute caching, inconsistencies may arise among the various client
caches. To mitigate the effects of these inconsistencies and given
the context of typical file system APIs, the following rules should
be followed:
o The results of unsuccessful LOOKUPs should not be cached, unless
they are specifically reverified at the point of use.
o An upper time boundary is maintained on how long a client name
cache entry can be kept without verifying that the entry has not
been made invalid by a directory change operation performed by
another client.
When a client is not making changes to a directory for which there
exist name cache entries, the client needs to periodically fetch
attributes for that directory to ensure that it is not being
modified. After determining that no modification has occurred, the
expiration time for the associated name cache entries may be updated
to be the current time plus the name cache staleness bound.
When a client is making changes to a given directory, it needs to
determine whether there have been changes made to the directory by
other clients. It does this by using the change attribute as
reported before and after the directory operation in the associated
change_info4 value returned for the operation. The server is able to
communicate to the client whether the change_info4 data is provided
atomically with respect to the directory operation. If the change
values are provided atomically, the client is then able to compare
the pre-operation change value with the change value in the client's
name cache. If the comparison indicates that the directory was
updated by another client, the name cache associated with the
modified directory is purged from the client. If the comparison
indicates no modification, the name cache can be updated on the
client to reflect the directory operation and the associated timeout
extended. The post-operation change value needs to be saved as the
basis for future change_info4 comparisons.
As demonstrated by the scenario above, name caching requires that the
client revalidate name cache data by inspecting the change attribute
of a directory at the point when the name cache item was cached.
This requires that the server update the change attribute for
Expires: December 2002 [Page 90]
Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol July 2002
directories when the contents of the corresponding directory is
modified. For a client to use the change_info4 information
appropriately and correctly, the server must report the pre and post
operation change attribute values atomically. When the server is
unable to report the before and after values atomically with respect
to the directory operation, the server must indicate that fact in the
change_info4 return value. When the information is not atomically
reported, the client should not assume that other clients have not
changed the directory.
9.8. Directory Caching
The results of READDIR operations may be used to avoid subsequent
READDIR operations. Just as in the cases of attribute and name
caching, inconsistencies may arise among the various client caches.
To mitigate the effects of these inconsistencies, and given the
context of typical file system APIs, the following rules should be
followed:
o Cached READDIR information for a directory which is not obtained
in a single READDIR operation must always be a consistent
snapshot of directory contents. This is determined by using a
GETATTR before the first READDIR and after the last of READDIR
that contributes to the cache.
o An upper time boundary is maintained to indicate the length of
time a directory cache entry is considered valid before the
client must revalidate the cached information.
The revalidation technique parallels that discussed in the case of
name caching. When the client is not changing the directory in
question, checking the change attribute of the directory with GETATTR
is adequate. The lifetime of the cache entry can be extended at
these checkpoints. When a client is modifying the directory, the
client needs to use the change_info4 data to determine whether there
are other clients modifying the directory. If it is determined that
no other client modifications are occurring, the client may update
its directory cache to reflect its own changes.
As demonstrated previously, directory caching requires that the
client revalidate directory cache data by inspecting the change
attribute of a directory at the point when the directory was cached.
This requires that the server update the change attribute for
directories when the contents of the corresponding directory is
modified. For a client to use the change_info4 information
appropriately and correctly, the server must report the pre and post
operation change attribute values atomically. When the server is
unable to report the before and after values atomically with respect
to the directory operation, the server must indicate that fact in the
change_info4 return value. When the information is not atomically
reported, the client should not assume that other clients have not
Expires: December 2002 [Page 91]
Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol July 2002
changed the directory.
Expires: December 2002 [Page 92]
Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol July 2002
10. Minor Versioning
To address the requirement of an NFS protocol that can evolve as the
need arises, the NFS version 4 protocol contains the rules and
framework to allow for future minor changes or versioning.
The base assumption with respect to minor versioning is that any
future accepted minor version must follow the IETF process and be
documented in a standards track RFC. Therefore, each minor version
number will correspond to an RFC. Minor version zero of the NFS
version 4 protocol is represented by this RFC. The COMPOUND
procedure will support the encoding of the minor version being
requested by the client.
The following items represent the basic rules for the development of
minor versions. Note that a future minor version may decide to
modify or add to the following rules as part of the minor version
definition.
1 Procedures are not added or deleted
To maintain the general RPC model, NFS version 4 minor versions
will not add or delete procedures from the NFS program.
2 Minor versions may add operations to the COMPOUND and
CB_COMPOUND procedures.
The addition of operations to the COMPOUND and CB_COMPOUND
procedures does not affect the RPC model.
2.1 Minor versions may append attributes to GETATTR4args, bitmap4,
and GETATTR4res.
This allows for the expansion of the attribute model to allow
for future growth or adaptation.
2.2 Minor version X must append any new attributes after the last
documented attribute.
Since attribute results are specified as an opaque array of
per-attribute XDR encoded results, the complexity of adding new
attributes in the midst of the current definitions will be too
burdensome.
3 Minor versions must not modify the structure of an existing
operation's arguments or results.
Expires: December 2002 [Page 93]
Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol July 2002
Again the complexity of handling multiple structure definitions
for a single operation is too burdensome. New operations should
be added instead of modifying existing structures for a minor
version.
This rule does not preclude the following adaptations in a minor
version.
o adding bits to flag fields such as new attributes to
GETATTR's bitmap4 data type
o adding bits to existing attributes like ACLs that have flag
words
o extending enumerated types (including NFS4ERR_*) with new
values
4 Minor versions may not modify the structure of existing
attributes.
5 Minor versions may not delete operations.
This prevents the potential reuse of a particular operation
"slot" in a future minor version.
6 Minor versions may not delete attributes.
7 Minor versions may not delete flag bits or enumeration values.
8 Minor versions may declare an operation as mandatory to NOT
implement.
Specifying an operation as "mandatory to not implement" is
equivalent to obsoleting an operation. For the client, it means
that the operation should not be sent to the server. For the
server, an NFS error can be returned as opposed to "dropping"
the request as an XDR decode error. This approach allows for
the obsolescence of an operation while maintaining its structure
so that a future minor version can reintroduce the operation.
8.1 Minor versions may declare attributes mandatory to NOT
implement.
8.2 Minor versions may declare flag bits or enumeration values as
mandatory to NOT implement.
Expires: December 2002 [Page 94]
Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol July 2002
9 Minor versions may downgrade features from mandatory to
recommended, or recommended to optional.
10 Minor versions may upgrade features from optional to recommended
or recommended to mandatory.
11 A client and server that support minor version X must support
minor versions 0 (zero) through X-1 as well.
12 No new features may be introduced as mandatory in a minor
version.
This rule allows for the introduction of new functionality and
forces the use of implementation experience before designating a
feature as mandatory.
13 A client MUST NOT attempt to use a stateid, file handle, or
similar returned object from the COMPOUND procedure with minor
version X for another COMPOUND procedure with minor version Y,
where X != Y.
Expires: December 2002 [Page 95]
Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol July 2002
11. Internationalization
The primary issue in which NFS needs to deal with
internationalization, or I18N, is with respect to file names and
other strings as used within the protocol. The choice of string
representation must allow reasonable name/string access to clients
which use various languages. The UTF-8 encoding of the UCS as
defined by [ISO10646] allows for this type of access and follows the
policy described in "IETF Policy on Character Sets and Languages",
[RFC2277]. This choice is explained further in the following.
11.1. Universal Versus Local Character Sets
[RFC1345] describes a table of 16 bit characters for many different
languages (the bit encodings match Unicode, though of course RFC1345
is somewhat out of date with respect to current Unicode assignments).
Each character from each language has a unique 16 bit value in the 16
bit character set. Thus this table can be thought of as a universal
character set. [RFC1345] then talks about groupings of subsets of
the entire 16 bit character set into "Charset Tables". For example
one might take all the Greek characters from the 16 bit table (which
are consecutively allocated), and normalize their offsets to a table
that fits in 7 bits. Thus it is determined that "lower case alpha"
is in the same position as "upper case a" in the US-ASCII table, and
"upper case alpha" is in the same position as "lower case a" in the
US-ASCII table.
These normalized subset character sets can be thought of as "local
character sets", suitable for an operating system locale.
Local character sets are not suitable for the NFS protocol. Consider
someone who creates a file with a name in a Swedish character set.
If someone else later goes to access the file with their locale set
to the Swedish language, then there are no problems. But if someone
in say the US-ASCII locale goes to access the file, the file name
will look very different, because the Swedish characters in the 7 bit
table will now be represented in US-ASCII characters on the display.
It would be preferable to give the US-ASCII user a way to display the
file name using Swedish glyphs. In order to do that, the NFS protocol
would have to include the locale with the file name on each operation
to create a file.
But then what of the situation when there is a path name on the
server like:
/component-1/component-2/component-3
Each component could have been created with a different locale. If
one issues CREATE with multi-component path name, and if some of the
leading components already exist, what is to be done with the
existing components? Is the current locale attribute replaced with
the user's current one? These types of situations quickly become too
Expires: December 2002 [Page 96]
Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol July 2002
complex when there is an alternate solution.
If the NFS version 4 protocol used a universal 16 bit or 32 bit
character set (or an encoding of a 16 bit or 32 bit character set
into octets), then the server and client need not care if the locale
of the user accessing the file is different than the locale of the
user who created the file. The unique 16 bit or 32 bit encoding of
the character allows for determination of what language the character
is from and also how to display that character on the client. The
server need not know what locales are used.
11.2. Overview of Universal Character Set Standards
The previous section makes a case for using a universal character
set. This section makes the case for using UTF-8 as the specific
universal character set for the NFS version 4 protocol.
[RFC2279] discusses UTF-* (UTF-8 and other UTF-XXX encodings),
Unicode, and UCS-*. There are two standards bodies managing
universal code sets:
o ISO/IEC which has the standard 10646-1
o Unicode which has the Unicode standard
Both standards bodies have pledged to track each other's assignments
of character codes.
The following is a brief analysis of the various standards.
UCS Universal Character Set. This is ISO/IEC 10646-1: "a
multi-octet character set called the Universal Character
Set (UCS), which encompasses most of the world's writing
systems."
UCS-2 a two octet per character encoding that addresses the first
2^16 characters of UCS. Currently there are no UCS
characters beyond that range.
UCS-4 a four octet per character encoding that permits the
encoding of up to 2^31 characters.
UTF UTF is an abbreviation of the term "UCS transformation
format" and is used in the naming of various standards for
encoding of UCS characters as described below.
UTF-1 Only historical interest; it has been removed from 10646-1
Expires: December 2002 [Page 97]
Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol July 2002
UTF-7 Encodes the entire "repertoire" of UCS "characters using
only octets with the higher order bit clear". [RFC2152]
describes UTF-7. UTF-7 accomplishes this by reserving one
of the 7bit US-ASCII characters as a "shift" character to
indicate non-US-ASCII characters.
UTF-8 Unlike UTF-7, uses all 8 bits of the octets. US-ASCII
characters are encoded as before unchanged. Any octet with
the high bit cleared can only mean a US-ASCII character.
The high bit set means that a UCS character is being
encoded.
UTF-16 Encodes UCS-4 characters into UCS-2 characters using a
reserved range in UCS-2.
Unicode Unicode and UCS-2 are the same; [RFC2279] states:
Up to the present time, changes in Unicode and amendments
to ISO/IEC 10646 have tracked each other, so that the
character repertoires and code point assignments have
remained in sync. The relevant standardization committees
have committed to maintain this very useful synchronism.
11.3. Difficulties with UCS-4, UCS-2, Unicode
Adapting existing applications, and file systems to multi-octet
schemes like UCS and Unicode can be difficult. A significant amount
of code has been written to process streams of bytes. Also there are
many existing stored objects described with 7 bit or 8 bit
characters. Doubling or quadrupling the bandwidth and storage
requirements seems like an expensive way to accomplish I18N.
UCS-2 and Unicode are "only" 16 bits long. That might seem to be
enough but, according to [Unicode1], 49,194 Unicode characters are
already assigned. According to [Unicode2] there are still more
languages that need to be added.
11.4. UTF-8 and its solutions
UTF-8 solves problems for NFS that exist with the use of UCS and
Unicode. UTF-8 will encode 16 bit and 32 bit characters in a way
that will be compact for most users. The encoding table from UCS-4 to
UTF-8, as copied from [RFC2279]:
UCS-4 range (hex.) UTF-8 octet sequence (binary)
0000 0000-0000 007F 0xxxxxxx
0000 0080-0000 07FF 110xxxxx 10xxxxxx
0000 0800-0000 FFFF 1110xxxx 10xxxxxx 10xxxxxx
Expires: December 2002 [Page 98]
Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol July 2002
0001 0000-001F FFFF 11110xxx 10xxxxxx 10xxxxxx 10xxxxxx
0020 0000-03FF FFFF 111110xx 10xxxxxx 10xxxxxx 10xxxxxx 10xxxxxx
0400 0000-7FFF FFFF 1111110x 10xxxxxx 10xxxxxx 10xxxxxx 10xxxxxx
10xxxxxx
See [RFC2279] for precise encoding and decoding rules. Note because
of UTF-16, the algorithm from Unicode/UCS-2 to UTF-8 needs to account
for the reserved range between D800 and DFFF.
Note that the 16 bit UCS or Unicode characters require no more than 3
octets to encode into UTF-8
Interestingly, UTF-8 has room to handle characters larger than 31
bits, because the leading octet of form:
1111111x
is not defined. If needed, ISO could either use that octet to
indicate a sequence of an encoded 8 octet character, or perhaps use
11111110 to permit the next octet to indicate an even more expandable
character set.
So using UTF-8 to represent character encodings means never having to
run out of room.
11.5. Normalization
The client and server operating environments may differ in their
policies and operational methods with respect to character
normalization (See [Unicode1] for a discussion of normalization
forms). This difference may also exist between applications on the
same client. This adds to the difficulty of providing a single
normalization policy for the protocol that allows for maximal
interoperability. This issue is similar to the character case issues
where the server may or may not support case insensitive file name
matching and may or may not preserve the character case when storing
file names. The protocol does not mandate a particular behavior but
allows for the various permutations.
The NFS version 4 protocol does not mandate the use of a particular
normalization form at this time. A later revision of this
specification may specify a particular normalization form.
Therefore, the server and client can expect that they may receive
unnormalized characters within protocol requests and responses. If
the operating environment requires normalization, then the
implementation must normalize the various UTF-8 encoded strings
within the protocol before presenting the information to an
application (at the client) or local file system (at the server).
Expires: December 2002 [Page 99]
Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol July 2002
12. Error Definitions
NFS error numbers are assigned to failed operations within a compound
request. A compound request contains a number of NFS operations that
have their results encoded in sequence in a compound reply. The
results of successful operations will consist of an NFS4_OK status
followed by the encoded results of the operation. If an NFS
operation fails, an error status will be entered in the reply and the
compound request will be terminated.
A description of each defined error follows:
NFS4_OK Indicates the operation completed successfully.
NFS4ERR_ACCESS Permission denied. The caller does not have the
correct permission to perform the requested
operation. Contrast this with NFS4ERR_PERM,
which restricts itself to owner or privileged
user permission failures.
NFS4ERR_ATTRNOTSUPP An attribute specified is not supported by the
server. Does not apply to the GETATTR
operation.
NFS4ERR_BADHANDLE Illegal NFS file handle. The file handle failed
internal consistency checks.
NFS4ERR_BADOWNER An owner, owner_group, or ACL attribute value
can not be translated to local representation.
NFS4ERR_BADTYPE An attempt was made to create an object of a
type not supported by the server.
NFS4ERR_BAD_COOKIE READDIR cookie is stale.
NFS4ERR_BAD_SEQID The sequence number in a locking request is
neither the next expected number or the last
number processed.
NFS4ERR_BAD_STATEID A stateid generated by the current server
instance, but which does not designate any
locking state (either current or superseded)
for a current lockowner-file pair, was used.
NFS4ERR_BADXDR The server encountered an XDR decoding error
while processing an operation.
NFS4ERR_CLID_INUSE The SETCLIENTID procedure has found that a
client id is already in use by another client.
Expires: December 2002 [Page 100]
Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol July 2002
NFS4ERR_DELAY The server initiated the request, but was not
able to complete it in a timely fashion. The
client should wait and then try the request
with a new RPC transaction ID. For example,
this error should be returned from a server
that supports hierarchical storage and receives
a request to process a file that has been
migrated. In this case, the server should start
the immigration process and respond to client
with this error. This error may also occur
when a necessary delegation recall makes
processing a request in a timely fashion
impossible.
NFS4ERR_DENIED An attempt to lock a file is denied. Since
this may be a temporary condition, the client
is encouraged to retry the lock request until
the lock is accepted.
NFS4ERR_DQUOT Resource (quota) hard limit exceeded. The
user's resource limit on the server has been
exceeded.
NFS4ERR_EXIST File exists. The file specified already exists.
NFS4ERR_EXPIRED A lease has expired that is being used in the
current procedure.
NFS4ERR_FBIG File too large. The operation would have caused
a file to grow beyond the server's limit.
NFS4ERR_FHEXPIRED The file handle provided is volatile and has
expired at the server.
NFS4ERR_GRACE The server is in its recovery or grace period
which should match the lease period of the
server.
NFS4ERR_INVAL Invalid argument or unsupported argument for an
operation. Two examples are attempting a
READLINK on an object other than a symbolic
link or attempting to SETATTR a time field on a
server that does not support this operation.
NFS4ERR_IO I/O error. A hard error (for example, a disk
error) occurred while processing the requested
operation.
NFS4ERR_ISDIR Is a directory. The caller specified a
directory in a non-directory operation.
NFS4ERR_LEASE_MOVED A lease being renewed is associated with a file
Expires: December 2002 [Page 101]
Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol July 2002
system that has been migrated to a new server.
NFS4ERR_LOCKED A read or write operation was attempted on a
locked file.
NFS4ERR_LOCK_RANGE A lock request is operating on a sub-range of a
current lock for the lock owner and the server
does not support this type of request.
NFS4ERR_MINOR_VERS_MISMATCH
The server has received a request that
specifies an unsupported minor version. The
server must return a COMPOUND4res with a zero
length operations result array.
NFS4ERR_MLINK Too many hard links.
NFS4ERR_MOVED The filesystem which contains the current
filehandle object has been relocated or
migrated to another server. The client may
obtain the new filesystem location by obtaining
the "fs_locations" attribute for the current
filehandle. For further discussion, refer to
the section "Filesystem Migration or
Relocation".
NFS4ERR_NAMETOOLONG The filename in an operation was too long.
NFS4ERR_NODEV No such device.
NFS4ERR_NOENT No such file or directory. The file or
directory name specified does not exist.
NFS4ERR_NOFILEHANDLE The logical current file handle value has not
been set properly. This may be a result of a
malformed COMPOUND operation (i.e. no PUTFH or
PUTROOTFH before an operation that requires the
current file handle be set).
NFS4ERR_NO_GRACE A reclaim of client state has fallen outside of
the grace period of the server. As a result,
the server can not guarantee that conflicting
state has not been provided to another client.
NFS4ERR_NOSPC No space left on device. The operation would
have caused the server's file system to exceed
its limit.
NFS4ERR_NOTDIR Not a directory. The caller specified a non-
directory in a directory operation.
NFS4ERR_NOTEMPTY An attempt was made to remove a directory that
Expires: December 2002 [Page 102]
Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol July 2002
was not empty.
NFS4ERR_NOTSUPP Operation is not supported.
NFS4ERR_NOT_SAME This error is returned by the VERIFY operation
to signify that the attributes compared were
not the same as provided in the client's
request.
NFS4ERR_NXIO I/O error. No such device or address.
NFS4ERR_OLD_STATEID A stateid which designates the locking state
for a lockowner-file at an earlier time was
used.
NFS4ERR_OPENMODE The client attempted a READ, WRITE, or SETATTR
operation not sanctioned by the stateid passed
(e.g. writing to a file opened only for read).
NFS4ERR_PERM Not owner. The operation was not allowed
because the caller is either not a privileged
user (root) or not the owner of the target of
the operation.
NFS4ERR_READDIR_NOSPC The encoded response to a READDIR request
exceeds the size limit set by the initial
request.
NFS4ERR_RECLAIM_BAD The reclaim provided by the client does not
match any of the server's state consistency
checks and is bad.
NFS4ERR_RECLAIM_CONFLICT
The reclaim provided by the client has
encountered a conflict and can not be provided.
Potentially indicates a misbehaving client.
NFS4ERR_RESOURCE For the processing of the COMPOUND procedure,
the server may exhaust available resources and
can not continue processing procedures within
the COMPOUND operation. This error will be
returned from the server in those instances of
resource exhaustion related to the processing
of the COMPOUND procedure.
NFS4ERR_ROFS Read-only file system. A modifying operation
was attempted on a read-only file system.
NFS4ERR_SAME This error is returned by the NVERIFY operation
to signify that the attributes compared were
the same as provided in the client's request.
Expires: December 2002 [Page 103]
Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol July 2002
NFS4ERR_SERVERFAULT An error occurred on the server which does not
map to any of the legal NFS version 4 protocol
error values. The client should translate this
into an appropriate error. UNIX clients may
choose to translate this to EIO.
NFS4ERR_SHARE_DENIED An attempt to OPEN a file with a share
reservation has failed because of a share
conflict.
NFS4ERR_STALE Invalid file handle. The file handle given in
the arguments was invalid. The file referred to
by that file handle no longer exists or access
to it has been revoked.
NFS4ERR_STALE_CLIENTID A clientid not recognized by the server was
used in a locking or SETCLIENTID_CONFIRM
request.
NFS4ERR_STALE_STATEID A stateid generated by an earlier server
instance was used.
NFS4ERR_SYMLINK The current file handle provided for a LOOKUP
is not a directory but a symbolic link. Also
used if the final component of the OPEN path is
a symbolic link.
NFS4ERR_TOOSMALL Buffer or request is too small.
NFS4ERR_WRONGSEC The security mechanism being used by the client
for the procedure does not match the server's
security policy. The client should change the
security mechanism being used and retry the
operation.
NFS4ERR_XDEV Attempt to do a cross-device hard link.
Expires: December 2002 [Page 104]
Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol July 2002
13. NFS Version 4 Requests
For the NFS version 4 RPC program, there are two traditional RPC
procedures: NULL and COMPOUND. All other functionality is defined as
a set of operations and these operations are defined in normal
XDR/RPC syntax and semantics. However, these operations are
encapsulated within the COMPOUND procedure. This requires that the
client combine one or more of the NFS version 4 operations into a
single request.
The NFS4_CALLBACK program is used to provide server to client
signaling and is constructed in a similar fashion as the NFS version
4 program. The procedures CB_NULL and CB_COMPOUND are defined in the
same way as NULL and COMPOUND are within the NFS program. The
CB_COMPOUND request also encapsulates the remaining operations of the
NFS4_CALLBACK program. There is no predefined RPC program number for
the NFS4_CALLBACK program. It is up to the client to specify a
program number in the "transient" program range. The program and
port number of the NFS4_CALLBACK program are provided by the client
as part of the SETCLIENTID operation and therefore is fixed for the
life of the client instantiation.
13.1. Compound Procedure
The COMPOUND procedure provides the opportunity for better
performance within high latency networks. The client can avoid
cumulative latency of multiple RPCs by combining multiple dependent
operations into a single COMPOUND procedure. A compound operation
may provide for protocol simplification by allowing the client to
combine basic procedures into a single request that is customized for
the client's environment.
The CB_COMPOUND procedure precisely parallels the features of
COMPOUND as described above.
The basic structure of the COMPOUND procedure is:
+-----+--------------+--------+-----------+-----------+-----------+--
| tag | minorversion | numops | op + args | op + args | op + args |
+-----+--------------+--------+-----------+-----------+-----------+--
and the reply's structure is:
+------------+-----+--------+-----------------------+--
|last status | tag | numres | status + op + results |
+------------+-----+--------+-----------------------+--
The numops and numres fields, used in the depiction above, represent
the count for the counted array encoding use to signify the number of
arguments or results encoded in the request and response. As per the
XDR encoding, these counts must match exactly the number of operation
Expires: December 2002 [Page 105]
Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol July 2002
arguments or results encoded.
13.2. Evaluation of a Compound Request
The server will process the COMPOUND procedure by evaluating each of
the operations within the COMPOUND procedure in order. Each
component operation consists of a 32 bit operation code, followed by
the argument of length determined by the type of operation. The
results of each operation are encoded in sequence into a reply
buffer. The results of each operation are preceded by the opcode and
a status code (normally zero). If an operation results in a non-zero
status code, the status will be encoded and evaluation of the
compound sequence will halt and the reply will be returned. Note
that evaluation stops even in the event of "non error" conditions
such as NFS4ERR_SAME.
There are no atomicity requirements for the operations contained
within the COMPOUND procedure. The operations being evaluated as
part of a COMPOUND request may be evaluated simultaneously with other
COMPOUND requests that the server receives.
It is the client's responsibility for recovering from any partially
completed COMPOUND procedure. Partially completed COMPOUND
procedures may occur at any point due to errors such as
NFS4ERR_RESOURCE and NFS4ERR_DELAY. This may occur even given an
otherwise valid operation string. Further, a server reboot which
occurs in the middle of processing a COMPOUND procedure may leave the
client with the difficult task of determining how far COMPOUND
processing has proceeded. Therefore, the client should avoid overly
complex COMPOUND procedures in the event of the failure of an
operation within the procedure.
Each operation assumes a "current" and "saved" filehandle that is
available as part of the execution context of the compound request.
Operations may set, change, or return the current filehandle. The
"saved" filehandle is used for temporary storage of a filehandle
value and as operands for the RENAME and LINK operations.
13.3. Synchronous Modifying Operations
NFS version 4 operations that modify the file system are synchronous.
When an operation is successfully completed at the server, the client
can depend that any data associated with the request is now on stable
storage (the one exception is in the case of the file data in a WRITE
operation with the UNSTABLE option specified).
This implies that any previous operations within the same compound
request are also reflected in stable storage. This behavior enables
the client's ability to recover from a partially executed compound
request which may resulted from the failure of the server. For
Expires: December 2002 [Page 106]
Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol July 2002
example, if a compound request contains operations A and B and the
server is unable to send a response to the client, depending on the
progress the server made in servicing the request the result of both
operations may be reflected in stable storage or just operation A may
be reflected. The server must not have just the results of operation
B in stable storage.
13.4. Operation Values
The operations encoded in the COMPOUND procedure are identified by
operation values. To avoid overlap with the RPC procedure numbers,
operations 0 (zero) and 1 are not defined. Operation 2 is not
defined but reserved for future use with minor versioning.
Expires: December 2002 [Page 107]
Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol July 2002
14. NFS Version 4 Procedures
14.1. Procedure 0: NULL - No Operation
SYNOPSIS
<null>
ARGUMENT
void;
RESULT
void;
DESCRIPTION
Standard NULL procedure. Void argument, void response. This
procedure has no functionality associated with it. Because of this
it is sometimes used to measure the overhead of processing a
service request. Therefore, the server should ensure that no
unnecessary work is done in servicing this procedure.
ERRORS
None.
Expires: December 2002 [Page 108]
Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol July 2002
14.2. Procedure 1: COMPOUND - Compound Operations
SYNOPSIS
compoundargs -> compoundres
ARGUMENT
union nfs_argop4 switch (nfs_opnum4 argop) {
case <OPCODE>: <argument>;
...
};
struct COMPOUND4args {
utf8string tag;
uint32_t minorversion;
nfs_argop4 argarray<>;
};
RESULT
union nfs_resop4 switch (nfs_opnum4 resop){
case <OPCODE>: <result>;
...
};
struct COMPOUND4res {
nfsstat4 status;
utf8string tag;
nfs_resop4 resarray<>;
};
DESCRIPTION
The COMPOUND procedure is used to combine one or more of the NFS
operations into a single RPC request. The main NFS RPC program has
two main procedures: NULL and COMPOUND. All other operations use
the COMPOUND procedure as a wrapper.
The COMPOUND procedure is used to combine individual operations
into a single RPC request. The server interprets each of the
operations in turn. If an operation is executed by the server and
the status of that operation is NFS4_OK, then the next operation in
the COMPOUND procedure is executed. The server continues this
process until there are no more operations to be executed or one of
the operations has a status value other than NFS4_OK.
Expires: December 2002 [Page 109]
Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol July 2002
In the processing of the COMPOUND procedure, the server may find
that it does not have the available resources to execute any or all
of the operations within the COMPOUND sequence. In this case, the
error NFS4ERR_RESOURCE will be returned for the particular
operation within the COMPOUND procedure where the resource
exhaustion occurred. This assumes that all previous operations
within the COMPOUND sequence have been evaluated successfully. The
results for all of the evaluated operations must be returned to the
client.
The server will generally choose between two methods of decoding
the client's request. The first would be the traditional one pass
XDR decode. If there is an XDR decoding error in this case, the
RPC XDR decode error would be returned. The second method would be
to make an initial pass to decode the basic COMPOUND request and
then to XDR decode the individual operations; the most interesting
is the decode of attributes. In this case, the server may
encounter an XDR decode error during the second pass. In this
case, the server would return the error NFS4ERR_BADXDR to signify
the decode error.
The COMPOUND arguments contain a "minorversion" field. The initial
and default value for this field is 0 (zero). This field will be
used by future minor versions such that the client can communicate
to the server what minor version is being requested. If the server
receives a COMPOUND procedure with a minorversion field value that
it does not support, the server MUST return an error of
NFS4ERR_MINOR_VERS_MISMATCH and a zero length resultdata array.
Contained within the COMPOUND results is a "status" field. If the
results array length is non-zero, this status must be equivalent to
the status of the last operation that was executed within the
COMPOUND procedure. Therefore, if an operation incurred an error
then the "status" value will be the same error value as is being
returned for the operation that failed.
Note that operations, 0 (zero) and 1 (one) are not defined for the
COMPOUND procedure. If the server receives an operation array with
either of these included, an error of NFS4ERR_NOTSUPP must be
returned. Operation 2 is not defined but reserved for future
definition and use with minor versioning. If the server receives a
operation array that contains operation 2 and the minorversion
field has a value of 0 (zero), an error of NFS4ERR_NOTSUPP is
returned. If an operation array contains an operation 2 and the
minorversion field is non-zero and the server does not support the
minor version, the server returns an error of
NFS4ERR_MINOR_VERS_MISMATCH. Therefore, the
NFS4ERR_MINOR_VERS_MISMATCH error takes precedence over all other
errors.
It is possible that the server receives a request that contains an
operation that is beyond the last defined operation (e.g.
Expires: December 2002 [Page 110]
Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol July 2002
OP_WRITE). In this case, the server obviously will fail the
unknown operation. If this occurs, the server will return an
operation "opcode" that is 1 greater than the largest defined
operation. For example, the server would return an opcode of
OP_WRITE + 1. The server would then return a status of
NFS4ERR_NOTSUPP to indicate an operation that is not defined and
therefore not supported.
The definition of the "tag" in the request is left to the
implementor. It may be used to summarize the content of the
compound request for the benefit of packet sniffers and engineers
debugging implementations. However, the value of "tag" in the
response MUST be the same value as provided in the request.
IMPLEMENTATION
Since an error of any type may occur after only a portion of the
operations have been evaluated, the client must be prepared to
recover from any failure. If the source of an NFS4ERR_RESOURCE
error was a complex or lengthy set of operations, it is likely that
if the number of operations were reduced the server would be able
to evaluate them successfully. Therefore, the client is
responsible for dealing with this type of complexity in recovery.
ERRORS
All errors defined in the protocol
Expires: December 2002 [Page 111]
Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol July 2002
14.2.1. Operation 3: ACCESS - Check Access Rights
SYNOPSIS
(cfh), accessreq -> supported, accessrights
ARGUMENT
const ACCESS4_READ = 0x00000001;
const ACCESS4_LOOKUP = 0x00000002;
const ACCESS4_MODIFY = 0x00000004;
const ACCESS4_EXTEND = 0x00000008;
const ACCESS4_DELETE = 0x00000010;
const ACCESS4_EXECUTE = 0x00000020;
struct ACCESS4args {
/* CURRENT_FH: object */
uint32_t access;
};
RESULT
struct ACCESS4resok {
uint32_t supported;
uint32_t access;
};
union ACCESS4res switch (nfsstat4 status) {
case NFS4_OK:
ACCESS4resok resok4;
default:
void;
};
DESCRIPTION
ACCESS determines the access rights that a user, as identified by
the credentials in the RPC request, has with respect to the file
system object specified by the current filehandle. The client
encodes the set of access rights that are to be checked in the bit
mask "access". The server checks the permissions encoded in the
bit mask. If a status of NFS4_OK is returned, two bit masks are
included in the response. The first, "supported", represents the
access rights for which the server can verify reliably. The
second, "access", represents the access rights available to the
user for the filehandle provided. On success, the current
filehandle retains its value.
Expires: December 2002 [Page 112]
Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol July 2002
Note that the supported field will contain only as many values as
was originally sent in the arguments. For example, if the client
sends an ACCESS operation with only the ACCESS4_READ value set and
the server supports this value, the server will return only
ACCESS4_READ even if it could have reliably checked other values.
The results of this operation are necessarily advisory in nature.
A return status of NFS4_OK and the appropriate bit set in the bit
mask does not imply that such access will be allowed to the file
system object in the future. This is because access rights can be
revoked by the server at any time.
The following access permissions may be requested:
ACCESS4_READ Read data from file or read a directory.
ACCESS4_LOOKUP Look up a name in a directory (no meaning for non-
directory objects).
ACCESS4_MODIFY Rewrite existing file data or modify existing
directory entries.
ACCESS4_EXTEND Write new data or add directory entries.
ACCESS4_DELETE Delete an existing directory entry (no meaning for
non-directory objects).
ACCESS4_EXECUTE Execute file (no meaning for a directory).
On success, the current filehandle retains its value.
IMPLEMENTATION
For the NFS version 4 protocol, the use of the ACCESS procedure
when opening a regular file is deprecated in favor of using OPEN.
In general, it is not sufficient for the client to attempt to
deduce access permissions by inspecting the uid, gid, and mode
fields in the file attributes or by attempting to interpret the
contents of the ACL attribute. This is because the server may
perform uid or gid mapping or enforce additional access control
restrictions. It is also possible that the server may not be in
the same ID space as the client. In these cases (and perhaps
others), the client can not reliably perform an access check with
only current file attributes.
In the NFS version 2 protocol, the only reliable way to determine
whether an operation was allowed was to try it and see if it
succeeded or failed. Using the ACCESS procedure in the NFS version
4 protocol, the client can ask the server to indicate whether or
not one or more classes of operations are permitted. The ACCESS
Expires: December 2002 [Page 113]
Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol July 2002
operation is provided to allow clients to check before doing a
series of operations which will result in an access failure. The
OPEN operation provides a point where the server can verify access
to the file object and method to return that information to the
client. The ACCESS operation is still useful for directory
operations or for use in the case the UNIX API "access" is used on
the client.
The information returned by the server in response to an ACCESS
call is not permanent. It was correct at the exact time that the
server performed the checks, but not necessarily afterwards. The
server can revoke access permission at any time.
The client should use the effective credentials of the user to
build the authentication information in the ACCESS request used to
determine access rights. It is the effective user and group
credentials that are used in subsequent read and write operations.
Many implementations do not directly support the ACCESS4_DELETE
permission. Operating systems like UNIX will ignore the
ACCESS4_DELETE bit if set on an access request on a non-directory
object. In these systems, delete permission on a file is
determined by the access permissions on the directory in which the
file resides, instead of being determined by the permissions of the
file itself. Therefore, the mask returned enumerating which access
rights can be determined will have the ACCESS4_DELETE value set to
0. This indicates to the client that the server was unable to
check that particular access right. The ACCESS4_DELETE bit in the
access mask returned will then be ignored by the client.
ERRORS
NFS4ERR_ACCESS
NFS4ERR_BADHANDLE
NFS4ERR_BADXDR
NFS4ERR_DELAY
NFS4ERR_FHEXPIRED
NFS4ERR_IO
NFS4ERR_MOVED
NFS4ERR_NOFILEHANDLE
NFS4ERR_RESOURCE
NFS4ERR_SERVERFAULT
NFS4ERR_STALE
NFS4ERR_WRONGSEC
Expires: December 2002 [Page 114]
Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol July 2002
14.2.2. Operation 4: CLOSE - Close File
SYNOPSIS
(cfh), seqid, open_stateid -> open_stateid
ARGUMENT
struct CLOSE4args {
/* CURRENT_FH: object */
seqid4 seqid
stateid4 open_stateid;
};
RESULT
union CLOSE4res switch (nfsstat4 status) {
case NFS4_OK:
stateid4 open_stateid;
default:
void;
};
DESCRIPTION
The CLOSE operation releases share reservations for the regular or
named attribute file as specified by the current filehandle. The
share reservations and other state information released at the
server as a result of this CLOSE is only associated with the
supplied stateid. The sequence id provides for the correct
ordering. State associated with other OPENs is not affected.
If record locks are held, the client SHOULD release all locks
before issuing a CLOSE. The server MAY free all outstanding locks
on CLOSE but some servers may not support the CLOSE of a file that
still has record locks held. The server MUST return failure if any
locks would exist after the CLOSE.
On success, the current filehandle retains its value.
IMPLEMENTATION
Even though CLOSE returns a stateid, this stateid is not useful to
the client and should be treated as deprecated. CLOSE "shuts down"
the state associated with all OPENs for the file by a single
Expires: December 2002 [Page 115]
Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol July 2002
open_owner. As noted above, CLOSE will either release all file
locking state or return an error. Therefore, the stateid returned
by CLOSE is not useful for operations that follow.
ERRORS
NFS4ERR_BADHANDLE
NFS4ERR_BAD_SEQID
NFS4ERR_BAD_STATEID
NFS4ERR_BADXDR
NFS4ERR_DELAY
NFS4ERR_EXPIRED
NFS4ERR_FHEXPIRED
NFS4ERR_GRACE
NFS4ERR_INVAL
NFS4ERR_ISDIR
NFS4ERR_LEASE_MOVED
NFS4ERR_LOCKS_HELD
NFS4ERR_MOVED
NFS4ERR_NOFILEHANDLE
NFS4ERR_OLD_STATEID
NFS4ERR_RESOURCE
NFS4ERR_SERVERFAULT
NFS4ERR_STALE
NFS4ERR_STALE_STATEID
Expires: December 2002 [Page 116]
Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol July 2002
14.2.3. Operation 5: COMMIT - Commit Cached Data
SYNOPSIS
(cfh), offset, count -> verifier
ARGUMENT
struct COMMIT4args {
/* CURRENT_FH: file */
offset4 offset;
count4 count;
};
RESULT
struct COMMIT4resok {
verifier4 writeverf;
};
union COMMIT4res switch (nfsstat4 status) {
case NFS4_OK:
COMMIT4resok resok4;
default:
void;
};
DESCRIPTION
The COMMIT operation forces or flushes data to stable storage for
the file specified by the current file handle. The flushed data is
that which was previously written with a WRITE operation which had
the stable field set to UNSTABLE4.
The offset specifies the position within the file where the flush
is to begin. An offset value of 0 (zero) means to flush data
starting at the beginning of the file. The count specifies the
number of bytes of data to flush. If count is 0 (zero), a flush
from offset to the end of the file is done.
The server returns a write verifier upon successful completion of
the COMMIT. The write verifier is used by the client to determine
if the server has restarted or rebooted between the initial
WRITE(s) and the COMMIT. The client does this by comparing the
write verifier returned from the initial writes and the verifier
returned by the COMMIT procedure. The server must vary the value
of the write verifier at each server event or instantiation that
may lead to a loss of uncommitted data. Most commonly this occurs
when the server is rebooted; however, other events at the server
Expires: December 2002 [Page 117]
Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol July 2002
may result in uncommitted data loss as well.
On success, the current filehandle retains its value.
IMPLEMENTATION
The COMMIT procedure is similar in operation and semantics to the
POSIX fsync(2) system call that synchronizes a file's state with
the disk (file data and metadata is flushed to disk or stable
storage). COMMIT performs the same operation for a client, flushing
any unsynchronized data and metadata on the server to the server's
disk or stable storage for the specified file. Like fsync(2), it
may be that there is some modified data or no modified data to
synchronize. The data may have been synchronized by the server's
normal periodic buffer synchronization activity. COMMIT should
return NFS4_OK, unless there has been an unexpected error.
COMMIT differs from fsync(2) in that it is possible for the client
to flush a range of the file (most likely triggered by a buffer-
reclamation scheme on the client before file has been completely
written).
The server implementation of COMMIT is reasonably simple. If the
server receives a full file COMMIT request, that is starting at
offset 0 and count 0, it should do the equivalent of fsync()'ing
the file. Otherwise, it should arrange to have the cached data in
the range specified by offset and count to be flushed to stable
storage. In both cases, any metadata associated with the file must
be flushed to stable storage before returning. It is not an error
for there to be nothing to flush on the server. This means that
the data and metadata that needed to be flushed have already been
flushed or lost during the last server failure.
The client implementation of COMMIT is a little more complex.
There are two reasons for wanting to commit a client buffer to
stable storage. The first is that the client wants to reuse a
buffer. In this case, the offset and count of the buffer are sent
to the server in the COMMIT request. The server then flushes any
cached data based on the offset and count, and flushes any metadata
associated with the file. It then returns the status of the flush
and the write verifier. The other reason for the client to
generate a COMMIT is for a full file flush, such as may be done at
close. In this case, the client would gather all of the buffers
for this file that contain uncommitted data, do the COMMIT
operation with an offset of 0 and count of 0, and then free all of
those buffers. Any other dirty buffers would be sent to the server
in the normal fashion.
After a buffer is written by the client with the stable parameter
set to UNSTABLE4, the buffer must be considered as modified by the
client until the buffer has either been flushed via a COMMIT
Expires: December 2002 [Page 118]
Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol July 2002
operation or written via a WRITE operation with stable parameter
set to FILE_SYNC4 or DATA_SYNC4. This is done to prevent the buffer
from being freed and reused before the data can be flushed to
stable storage on the server.
When a response is returned from either a WRITE or a COMMIT
operation and it contains a write verifier that is different than
previously returned by the server, the client will need to
retransmit all of the buffers containing uncommitted cached data to
the server. How this is to be done is up to the implementor. If
there is only one buffer of interest, then it should probably be
sent back over in a WRITE request with the appropriate stable
parameter. If there is more than one buffer, it might be
worthwhile retransmitting all of the buffers in WRITE requests with
the stable parameter set to UNSTABLE4 and then retransmitting the
COMMIT operation to flush all of the data on the server to stable
storage. The timing of these retransmissions is left to the
implementor.
The above description applies to page-cache-based systems as well
as buffer-cache-based systems. In those systems, the virtual
memory system will need to be modified instead of the buffer cache.
ERRORS
NFS4ERR_ACCESS
NFS4ERR_BADHANDLE
NFS4ERR_BADXDR
NFS4ERR_FHEXPIRED
NFS4ERR_INVAL
NFS4ERR_IO
NFS4ERR_ISDIR
NFS4ERR_MOVED
NFS4ERR_NOFILEHANDLE
NFS4ERR_RESOURCE
NFS4ERR_ROFS
NFS4ERR_SERVERFAULT
NFS4ERR_STALE
NFS4ERR_WRONGSEC
Expires: December 2002 [Page 119]
Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol July 2002
14.2.4. Operation 6: CREATE - Create a Non-Regular File Object
SYNOPSIS
(cfh), name, type, attrs -> (cfh), change_info, attrs_set
ARGUMENT
union createtype4 switch (nfs_ftype4 type) {
case NF4LNK:
linktext4 linkdata;
case NF4BLK:
case NF4CHR:
specdata4 devdata;
case NF4SOCK:
case NF4FIFO:
case NF4DIR:
void;
};
struct CREATE4args {
/* CURRENT_FH: directory for creation */
component4 objname;
createtype4 objtype;
fattr4 createattrs;
};
RESULT
struct CREATE4resok {
change_info4 cinfo;
bitmap4 attrset; /* attributes set */
};
union CREATE4res switch (nfsstat4 status) {
case NFS4_OK:
CREATE4resok resok4;
default:
void;
};
DESCRIPTION
The CREATE operation creates a non-regular file object in a
directory with a given name. The OPEN procedure MUST be used to
create a regular file.
The objname specifies the name for the new object. The objtype
determines the type of object to be created: directory, symlink,
Expires: December 2002 [Page 120]
Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol July 2002
etc.
If an object of the same name already exists in the directory, the
server will return the error NFS4ERR_EXIST.
For the directory where the new file object was created, the server
returns change_info4 information in cinfo. With the atomic field
of the change_info4 struct, the server will indicate if the before
and after change attributes were obtained atomically with respect
to the file object creation.
If the objname has a length of 0 (zero), or if objname does not
obey the UTF-8 definition, the error NFS4ERR_INVAL will be
returned.
The current filehandle is replaced by that of the new object.
The createattrs specifies the initial set of attributes for the
object. The set of attributes may include any writable attribute
valid for the object type. When the operation is successful, the
server will return to the client an attribute mask signifying which
attributes were successfully set for the object.
IMPLEMENTATION
If the client desires to set attribute values after the create, a
SETATTR operation can be added to the COMPOUND request so that the
appropriate attributes will be set.
It may be that the server's implementation places special meaning
on the names "." and ".." where they refer to special directories.
If this is the case and the client requests to CREATE a directory
(or other object) with these names, the server may return
NFS4ERR_INVAL. However, if the server does not place special
meaning on these names and a file object already exists with a
matching name, the server may return NFS4ERR_EXIST.
ERRORS
NFS4ERR_ACCESS
NFS4ERR_ATTRNOTSUPP
NFS4ERR_BADHANDLE
NFS4ERR_BADTYPE
NFS4ERR_BADXDR
NFS4ERR_DQUOT
NFS4ERR_EXIST
NFS4ERR_FHEXPIRED
NFS4ERR_INVAL
NFS4ERR_IO
NFS4ERR_MOVED
Expires: December 2002 [Page 121]
Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol July 2002
NFS4ERR_NAMETOOLONG
NFS4ERR_NOFILEHANDLE
NFS4ERR_NOSPC
NFS4ERR_NOTDIR
NFS4ERR_NOTSUPP
NFS4ERR_RESOURCE
NFS4ERR_ROFS
NFS4ERR_SERVERFAULT
NFS4ERR_STALE
NFS4ERR_WRONGSEC
Expires: December 2002 [Page 122]
Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol July 2002
14.2.5. Operation 7: DELEGPURGE - Purge Delegations Awaiting Recovery
SYNOPSIS
clientid ->
ARGUMENT
struct DELEGPURGE4args {
clientid4 clientid;
};
RESULT
struct DELEGPURGE4res {
nfsstat4 status;
};
DESCRIPTION
Purges all of the delegations awaiting recovery for a given client.
This is useful for clients which do not commit delegation
information to stable storage to indicate that conflicting requests
need not be delayed by the server awaiting recovery of delegation
information.
This operation should be used by clients that record delegation
information on stable storage on the client. In this case,
DELEGPURGE should be issued immediately after doing delegation
recovery on all delegations know to the client. Doing so will
notify the server that no additional delegations for the client
will be recovered allowing it to free resources, and avoid delaying
other clients who make requests that conflict with the unrecovered
delegations. The set of delegations known to the server and the
client may be different. The reason for this is that a client may
fail after making a request which resulted in delegation but before
it received the results and committed them to the client's stable
storage.
ERRORS
NFS4ERR_BADXDR
NFS4ERR_RESOURCE
NFS4ERR_SERVERFAULT
NFS4ERR_STALE_CLIENTID
Expires: December 2002 [Page 123]
Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol July 2002
14.2.6. Operation 8: DELEGRETURN - Return Delegation
SYNOPSIS
(cfh), stateid ->
ARGUMENT
struct DELEGRETURN4args {
/* CURRENT_FH: delegated file */
stateid4 stateid;
};
RESULT
struct DELEGRETURN4res {
nfsstat4 status;
};
DESCRIPTION
Returns the delegation represented by the current filehandle and
stateid.
ERRORS
NFS4ERR_BAD_STATEID
NFS4ERR_BADXDR
NFS4ERR_EXPIRED
NFS4ERR_OLD_STATEID
NFS4ERR_RESOURCE
NFS4ERR_SERVERFAULT
NFS4ERR_STALE_STATEID
Expires: December 2002 [Page 124]
Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol July 2002
14.2.7. Operation 9: GETATTR - Get Attributes
SYNOPSIS
(cfh), attrbits -> attrbits, attrvals
ARGUMENT
struct GETATTR4args {
/* CURRENT_FH: directory or file */
bitmap4 attr_request;
};
RESULT
struct GETATTR4resok {
fattr4 obj_attributes;
};
union GETATTR4res switch (nfsstat4 status) {
case NFS4_OK:
GETATTR4resok resok4;
default:
void;
};
DESCRIPTION
The GETATTR operation will obtain attributes for the file system
object specified by the current filehandle. The client sets a bit
in the bitmap argument for each attribute value that it would like
the server to return. The server returns an attribute bitmap that
indicates the attribute values for which it was able to return,
followed by the attribute values ordered lowest attribute number
first.
The server must return a value for each attribute that the client
requests if the attribute is supported by the server. If the
server does not support an attribute or cannot approximate a useful
value then it must not return the attribute value and must not set
the attribute bit in the result bitmap. The server must return an
error if it supports an attribute but cannot obtain its value. In
that case no attribute values will be returned.
All servers must support the mandatory attributes as specified in
the section "File Attributes".
On success, the current filehandle retains its value.
Expires: December 2002 [Page 125]
Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol July 2002
IMPLEMENTATION
ERRORS
NFS4ERR_ACCESS
NFS4ERR_BADHANDLE
NFS4ERR_BADXDR
NFS4ERR_DELAY
NFS4ERR_FHEXPIRED
NFS4ERR_INVAL
NFS4ERR_IO
NFS4ERR_MOVED
NFS4ERR_NOFILEHANDLE
NFS4ERR_RESOURCE
NFS4ERR_SERVERFAULT
NFS4ERR_STALE
NFS4ERR_WRONGSEC
Expires: December 2002 [Page 126]
Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol July 2002
14.2.8. Operation 10: GETFH - Get Current Filehandle
SYNOPSIS
(cfh) -> filehandle
ARGUMENT
/* CURRENT_FH: */
void;
RESULT
struct GETFH4resok {
nfs_fh4 object;
};
union GETFH4res switch (nfsstat4 status) {
case NFS4_OK:
GETFH4resok resok4;
default:
void;
};
DESCRIPTION
This operation returns the current filehandle value.
On success, the current filehandle retains its value.
IMPLEMENTATION
Operations that change the current filehandle like LOOKUP or CREATE
do not automatically return the new filehandle as a result. For
instance, if a client needs to lookup a directory entry and obtain
its filehandle then the following request is needed.
PUTFH (directory filehandle)
LOOKUP (entry name)
GETFH
ERRORS
NFS4ERR_BADHANDLE
NFS4ERR_FHEXPIRED
NFS4ERR_MOVED
Expires: December 2002 [Page 127]
Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol July 2002
NFS4ERR_NOFILEHANDLE
NFS4ERR_RESOURCE
NFS4ERR_SERVERFAULT
NFS4ERR_STALE
NFS4ERR_WRONGSEC
Expires: December 2002 [Page 128]
Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol July 2002
14.2.9. Operation 11: LINK - Create Link to a File
SYNOPSIS
(sfh), (cfh), newname -> (cfh), change_info
ARGUMENT
struct LINK4args {
/* SAVED_FH: source object */
/* CURRENT_FH: target directory */
component4 newname;
};
RESULT
struct LINK4resok {
change_info4 cinfo;
};
union LINK4res switch (nfsstat4 status) {
case NFS4_OK:
LINK4resok resok4;
default:
void;
};
DESCRIPTION
The LINK operation creates an additional newname for the file
represented by the saved filehandle, as set by the SAVEFH
operation, in the directory represented by the current filehandle.
The existing file and the target directory must reside within the
same file system on the server. On success, the current filehandle
will continue to be the target directory. If an object exists in
the target directory with the same name as newname, the server must
return NFS4ERR_EXIST.
For the target directory, the server returns change_info4
information in cinfo. With the atomic field of the change_info4
struct, the server will indicate if the before and after change
attributes were obtained atomically with respect to the link
creation.
If the newname has a length of 0 (zero), or if newname does not
obey the UTF-8 definition, the error NFS4ERR_INVAL will be
returned.
Expires: December 2002 [Page 129]
Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol July 2002
IMPLEMENTATION
Changes to any property of the "hard" linked files are reflected in
all of the linked files. When a link is made to a file, the
attributes for the file should have a value for numlinks that is
one greater than the value before the LINK operation.
The statement "file and the target directory must reside within the
same file system on the server" means that the fsid fields in the
attributes for the objects are the same. If they reside on
different file systems, the error, NFS4ERR_XDEV, is returned. On
some servers, the filenames, "." and "..", are illegal as newname.
In the case that newname is already linked to the file represented
by the saved filehandle, the server will return NFS4ERR_EXIST.
Note that symbolic links are created with the CREATE operation.
ERRORS
NFS4ERR_ACCESS
NFS4ERR_BADHANDLE
NFS4ERR_BADXDR
NFS4ERR_DELAY
NFS4ERR_DQUOT
NFS4ERR_EXIST
NFS4ERR_FHEXPIRED
NFS4ERR_INVAL
NFS4ERR_IO
NFS4ERR_ISDIR
NFS4ERR_MLINK
NFS4ERR_MOVED
NFS4ERR_NAMETOOLONG
NFS4ERR_NOENT
NFS4ERR_NOFILEHANDLE
NFS4ERR_NOSPC
NFS4ERR_NOTDIR
NFS4ERR_NOTSUPP
NFS4ERR_RESOURCE
NFS4ERR_ROFS
NFS4ERR_SERVERFAULT
NFS4ERR_STALE
NFS4ERR_WRONGSEC
NFS4ERR_XDEV
Expires: December 2002 [Page 130]
Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol July 2002
14.2.10. Operation 12: LOCK - Create Lock
SYNOPSIS
(cfh) locktype, reclaim, offset, length, locker -> stateid
ARGUMENT
struct open_to_lock_owner4 {
seqid4 open_seqid;
stateid4 open_stateid;
seqid4 lock_seqid;
lock_owner4 lock_owner;
};
struct exist_lock_owner4 {
stateid4 lock_stateid;
seqid4 lock_seqid;
};
union locker4 switch (bool new_lock_owner) {
case TRUE:
open_to_lock_owner4 open_owner;
case FALSE:
exist_lock_owner4 lock_owner;
};
enum nfs4_lock_type {
READ_LT = 1,
WRITE_LT = 2,
READW_LT = 3, /* blocking read */
WRITEW_LT = 4 /* blocking write */
};
struct LOCK4args {
/* CURRENT_FH: file */
nfs_lock_type4 locktype;
bool reclaim;
offset4 offset;
length4 length;
locker4 locker;
};
RESULT
struct LOCK4denied {
offset4 offset;
length4 length;
nfs_lock_type4 locktype;
Expires: December 2002 [Page 131]
Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol July 2002
lock_owner4 owner;
};
struct LOCK4resok {
stateid4 lock_stateid;
};
union LOCK4res switch (nfsstat4 status) {
case NFS4_OK:
LOCK4resok resok4;
case NFS4ERR_DENIED:
LOCK4denied denied;
default:
void;
};
DESCRIPTION
The LOCK operation requests a record lock for the byte range
specified by the offset and length parameters. The lock type is
also specified to be one of the nfs4_lock_types. If this is a
reclaim request, the reclaim parameter will be TRUE;
Bytes in a file may be locked even if those bytes are not currently
allocated to the file. To lock the file from a specific offset
through the end-of-file (no matter how long the file actually is)
use a length field with all bits set to 1 (one). To lock the
entire file, use an offset of 0 (zero) and a length with all bits
set to 1. A length of 0 is reserved and should not be used.
In the case that the lock is denied, the owner, offset, and length
of a conflicting lock are returned.
On success, the current filehandle retains its value.
IMPLEMENTATION
If the server is unable to determine the exact offset and length of
the conflicting lock, the same offset and length that were provided
in the arguments should be returned in the denied results. The
File Locking section contains a full description of this and the
other file locking operations.
ERRORS
NFS4ERR_ACCESS
NFS4ERR_BADHANDLE
NFS4ERR_BAD_SEQID
NFS4ERR_BAD_STATEID
Expires: December 2002 [Page 132]
Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol July 2002
NFS4ERR_BADXDR
NFS4ERR_DELAY
NFS4ERR_DENIED
NFS4ERR_EXPIRED
NFS4ERR_FHEXPIRED
NFS4ERR_GRACE
NFS4ERR_INVAL
NFS4ERR_ISDIR
NFS4ERR_LEASE_MOVED
NFS4ERR_LOCK_RANGE
NFS4ERR_MOVED
NFS4ERR_NOFILEHANDLE
NFS4ERR_NO_GRACE
NFS4ERR_OLD_STATEID
NFS4ERR_RECLAIM_BAD
NFS4ERR_RECLAIM_CONFLICT
NFS4ERR_RESOURCE
NFS4ERR_SERVERFAULT
NFS4ERR_STALE
NFS4ERR_STALE_CLIENTID
NFS4ERR_STALE_STATEID
NFS4ERR_WRONGSEC
Expires: December 2002 [Page 133]
Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol July 2002
14.2.11. Operation 13: LOCKT - Test For Lock
SYNOPSIS
(cfh) type, owner, offset, length -> {void, NFS4ERR_DENIED ->
owner}
ARGUMENT
struct LOCKT4args {
/* CURRENT_FH: file */
nfs_lock_type4 locktype;
nfs_lockowner4 owner;
offset4 offset;
length4 length;
};
RESULT
struct LOCK4denied {
nfs_lockowner4 owner;
offset4 offset;
length4 length;
nfs_lock_type4 locktype;
};
union LOCKT4res switch (nfsstat4 status) {
case NFS4ERR_DENIED:
LOCK4denied denied;
case NFS4_OK:
void;
default:
void;
};
DESCRIPTION
The LOCKT operation tests the lock as specified in the arguments.
If a conflicting lock exists, the owner, offset, length, and type
of the conflicting lock are returned; if no lock is held, nothing
other than NFS4_OK is returned.
On success, the current filehandle retains its value.
IMPLEMENTATION
If the server is unable to determine the exact offset and length of
Expires: December 2002 [Page 134]
Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol July 2002
the conflicting lock, the same offset and length that were provided
in the arguments should be returned in the denied results. The
File Locking section contains further discussion of the file
locking mechanisms.
LOCKT uses nfs_lockowner4 instead of a stateid4, as LOCK does, to
identify the owner so that the client does not have to open the
file to test for the existence of a lock.
ERRORS
NFS4ERR_ACCESS
NFS4ERR_BADHANDLE
NFS4ERR_BADXDR
NFS4ERR_DELAY
NFS4ERR_DENIED
NFS4ERR_FHEXPIRED
NFS4ERR_GRACE
NFS4ERR_INVAL
NFS4ERR_ISDIR
NFS4ERR_LEASE_MOVED
NFS4ERR_LOCK_RANGE
NFS4ERR_MOVED
NFS4ERR_NOFILEHANDLE
NFS4ERR_RESOURCE
NFS4ERR_SERVERFAULT
NFS4ERR_STALE
NFS4ERR_STALE_CLIENTID
NFS4ERR_WRONGSEC
Expires: December 2002 [Page 135]
Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol July 2002
14.2.12. Operation 14: LOCKU - Unlock File
SYNOPSIS
(cfh) type, seqid, stateid, offset, length -> stateid
ARGUMENT
struct LOCKU4args {
/* CURRENT_FH: file */
nfs_lock_type4 locktype;
seqid4 seqid;
stateid4 stateid;
offset4 offset;
length4 length;
};
RESULT
union LOCKU4res switch (nfsstat4 status) {
case NFS4_OK:
stateid4 stateid;
default:
void;
};
DESCRIPTION
The LOCKU operation unlocks the record lock specified by the
parameters.
On success, the current filehandle retains its value.
IMPLEMENTATION
The File Locking section contains a full description of this and
the other file locking procedures.
ERRORS
NFS4ERR_ACCESS
NFS4ERR_BADHANDLE
NFS4ERR_BAD_SEQID
NFS4ERR_BAD_STATEID
NFS4ERR_BADXDR
NFS4ERR_EXPIRED
NFS4ERR_FHEXPIRED
Expires: December 2002 [Page 136]
Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol July 2002
NFS4ERR_GRACE
NFS4ERR_INVAL
NFS4ERR_ISDIR
NFS4ERR_LOCK_RANGE
NFS4ERR_LEASE_MOVED
NFS4ERR_MOVED
NFS4ERR_NOFILEHANDLE
NFS4ERR_OLD_STATEID
NFS4ERR_RESOURCE
NFS4ERR_SERVERFAULT
NFS4ERR_STALE
NFS4ERR_STALE_CLIENTID
NFS4ERR_STALE_STATEID
Expires: December 2002 [Page 137]
Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol July 2002
14.2.13. Operation 15: LOOKUP - Lookup Filename
SYNOPSIS
(cfh), component -> (cfh)
ARGUMENT
struct LOOKUP4args {
/* CURRENT_FH: directory */
component4 objname;
};
RESULT
struct LOOKUP4res {
/* CURRENT_FH: object */
nfsstat4 status;
};
DESCRIPTION
This operation LOOKUPs or finds a file system object using the
directory specified by the current filehandle. LOOKUP evaluates
the component and if the object exists the current filehandle is
replaced with the component's filehandle.
If the component cannot be evaluated either because it does not
exist or because the client does not have permission to evaluate
the component, then an error will be returned and the current
filehandle will be unchanged.
If the component is a zero length string or if any component does
not obey the UTF-8 definition, the error NFS4ERR_INVAL will be
returned.
IMPLEMENTATION
If the client wants to acheive the effect of a multi-component
lookup, it may construct a COMPOUND request such as (and obtain
each filehandle):
Expires: December 2002 [Page 138]
Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol July 2002
PUTFH (directory filehandle)
LOOKUP "pub"
GETFH
LOOKUP "foo"
GETFH
LOOKUP "bar"
GETFH
NFS version 4 servers depart from the semantics of previous NFS
versions in allowing LOOKUP requests to cross mountpoints on the
server. The client can detect a mountpoint crossing by comparing
the fsid attribute of the directory with the fsid attribute of the
directory looked up. If the fsids are different then the new
directory is a server mountpoint. Unix clients that detect a
mountpoint crossing will need to mount the server's filesystem.
This needs to be done to maintain the file object identity checking
mechanisms common to Unix clients.
Servers that limit NFS access to "shares" or "exported" filesystems
should provide a pseudo-filesystem into which the exported
filesystems can be integrated, so that clients can browse the
server's name space. The clients view of a pseudo filesystem will
be limited to paths that lead to exported filesystems.
Note: previous versions of the protocol assigned special semantics
to the names "." and "..". NFS version 4 assigns no special
semantics to these names. The LOOKUPP operator must be used to
lookup a parent directory.
Note that this procedure does not follow symbolic links. The
client is responsible for all parsing of filenames including
filenames that are modified by symbolic links encountered during
the lookup process.
If the current file handle supplied is not a directory but a
symbolic link, the error NFS4ERR_SYMLINK is returned as the error.
For all other non-directory file types, the error NFS4ERR_NOTDIR is
returned.
ERRORS
NFS4ERR_ACCESS
NFS4ERR_BADHANDLE
NFS4ERR_BADXDR
NFS4ERR_FHEXPIRED
NFS4ERR_INVAL
NFS4ERR_IO
NFS4ERR_MOVED
NFS4ERR_NAMETOOLONG
NFS4ERR_NOENT
Expires: December 2002 [Page 139]
Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol July 2002
NFS4ERR_NOFILEHANDLE
NFS4ERR_NOTDIR
NFS4ERR_RESOURCE
NFS4ERR_SERVERFAULT
NFS4ERR_STALE
NFS4ERR_SYMLINK
NFS4ERR_WRONGSEC
Expires: December 2002 [Page 140]
Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol July 2002
14.2.14. Operation 16: LOOKUPP - Lookup Parent Directory
SYNOPSIS
(cfh) -> (cfh)
ARGUMENT
/* CURRENT_FH: object */
void;
RESULT
struct LOOKUPP4res {
/* CURRENT_FH: directory */
nfsstat4 status;
};
DESCRIPTION
The current filehandle is assumed to refer to a regular directory
or a named attribute directory. LOOKUPP assigns the filehandle for
its parent directory to be the current filehandle. If there is no
parent directory an NFS4ERR_NOENT error must be returned.
Therefore, NFS4ERR_NOENT will be returned by the server when the
current filehandle is at the root or top of the server's file tree.
IMPLEMENTATION
As for LOOKUP, LOOKUPP will also cross mountpoints.
If the current filehandle is not a directory or named attribute
directory, the error NFS4ERR_NOTDIR is returned.
ERRORS
NFS4ERR_ACCESS
NFS4ERR_BADHANDLE
NFS4ERR_FHEXPIRED
NFS4ERR_INVAL
NFS4ERR_IO
NFS4ERR_MOVED
NFS4ERR_NOENT
NFS4ERR_NOFILEHANDLE
NFS4ERR_NOTDIR
NFS4ERR_RESOURCE
NFS4ERR_SERVERFAULT
NFS4ERR_STALE
Expires: December 2002 [Page 141]
Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol July 2002
NFS4ERR_WRONGSEC
Expires: December 2002 [Page 142]
Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol July 2002
14.2.15. Operation 17: NVERIFY - Verify Difference in Attributes
SYNOPSIS
(cfh), fattr -> -
ARGUMENT
struct NVERIFY4args {
/* CURRENT_FH: object */
fattr4 obj_attributes;
};
RESULT
struct NVERIFY4res {
nfsstat4 status;
};
DESCRIPTION
This operation is used to prefix a sequence of operations to be
performed if one or more attributes have changed on some filesystem
object. If all the attributes match then the error NFS4ERR_SAME
must be returned.
On success, the current filehandle retains its value.
IMPLEMENTATION
This operation is useful as a cache validation operator. If the
object to which the attributes belong has changed then the
following operations may obtain new data associated with that
object. For instance, to check if a file has been changed and
obtain new data if it has:
PUTFH (public)
LOOKUP "pub" "foo" "bar"
NVERIFY attrbits attrs
READ 0 32767
In the case that a recommended attribute is specified in the
NVERIFY operation and the server does not support that attribute
for the file system object, the error NFS4ERR_NOTSUPP is returned
to the client.
Expires: December 2002 [Page 143]
Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol July 2002
ERRORS
NFS4ERR_ACCESS
NFS4ERR_ATTRNOTSUPP
NFS4ERR_BADHANDLE
NFS4ERR_BADXDR
NFS4ERR_DELAY
NFS4ERR_FHEXPIRED
NFS4ERR_INVAL
NFS4ERR_IO
NFS4ERR_MOVED
NFS4ERR_NOFILEHANDLE
NFS4ERR_NOTSUPP
NFS4ERR_RESOURCE
NFS4ERR_SAME
NFS4ERR_SERVERFAULT
NFS4ERR_STALE
NFS4ERR_WRONGSEC
Expires: December 2002 [Page 144]
Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol July 2002
14.2.16. Operation 18: OPEN - Open a Regular File
SYNOPSIS
(cfh), claim, openhow, owner, seqid, access, deny -> (cfh),
stateid, cinfo, rflags, open_confirm, attrset delegation
ARGUMENT
struct OPEN4args {
open_claim4 claim;
openflag4 openhow;
nfs_lockowner4 owner;
seqid4 seqid;
uint32_t share_access;
uint32_t share_deny;
};
enum createmode4 {
UNCHECKED4 = 0,
GUARDED4 = 1,
EXCLUSIVE4 = 2
};
union createhow4 switch (createmode4 mode) {
case UNCHECKED4:
case GUARDED4:
fattr4 createattrs;
case EXCLUSIVE4:
verifier4 createverf;
};
enum opentype4 {
OPEN4_NOCREATE = 0,
OPEN4_CREATE = 1
};
union openflag4 switch (opentype4 opentype) {
case OPEN4_CREATE:
createhow4 how;
default:
void;
};
/* Next definitions used for OPEN delegation */
enum limit_by4 {
NFS_LIMIT_SIZE = 1,
NFS_LIMIT_BLOCKS = 2
/* others as needed */
};
Expires: December 2002 [Page 145]
Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol July 2002
struct nfs_modified_limit4 {
uint32_t num_blocks;
uint32_t bytes_per_block;
};
union nfs_space_limit4 switch (limit_by4 limitby) {
/* limit specified as file size */
case NFS_LIMIT_SIZE:
uint64_t filesize;
/* limit specified by number of blocks */
case NFS_LIMIT_BLOCKS:
nfs_modified_limit4 mod_blocks;
} ;
enum open_delegation_type4 {
OPEN_DELEGATE_NONE = 0,
OPEN_DELEGATE_READ = 1,
OPEN_DELEGATE_WRITE = 2
};
enum open_claim_type4 {
CLAIM_NULL = 0,
CLAIM_PREVIOUS = 1,
CLAIM_DELEGATE_CUR = 2,
CLAIM_DELEGATE_PREV = 3
};
struct open_claim_delegate_cur4 {
stateid4 delegate_stateid;
component4 file;
};
union open_claim4 switch (open_claim_type4 claim) {
/*
* No special rights to file. Ordinary OPEN of the specified file.
*/
case CLAIM_NULL:
/* CURRENT_FH: directory */
component4 file;
/*
* Right to the file established by an open previous to server
* reboot. File identified by filehandle obtained at that time
* rather than by name.
*/
case CLAIM_PREVIOUS:
/* CURRENT_FH: file being reclaimed */
open_delegation_type4 delegate_type;
/*
* Right to file based on a delegation granted by the server.
* File is specified by name.
Expires: December 2002 [Page 146]
Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol July 2002
*/
case CLAIM_DELEGATE_CUR:
/* CURRENT_FH: directory */
open_claim_delegate_cur4 delegate_cur_info;
/* Right to file based on a delegation granted to a previous boot
* instance of the client. File is specified by name.
*/
case CLAIM_DELEGATE_PREV:
/* CURRENT_FH: directory */
component4 file_delegate_prev;
};
RESULT
struct open_read_delegation4 {
stateid4 stateid; /* Stateid for delegation*/
bool recall; /* Pre-recalled flag for
delegations obtained
by reclaim
(CLAIM_PREVIOUS) */
nfsace4 permissions; /* Defines users who don't
need an ACCESS call to
open for read */
};
struct open_write_delegation4 {
stateid4 stateid; /* Stateid for delegation*/
bool recall; /* Pre-recalled flag for
delegations obtained
by reclaim
(CLAIM_PREVIOUS) */
nfs_space_limit4 space_limit; /* Defines condition that
the client must check to
determine whether the
file needs to be flushed
to the server on close.
*/
nfsace4 permissions; /* Defines users who don't
need an ACCESS call as
part of a delegated
open. */
};
union open_delegation4
switch (open_delegation_type4 delegation_type) {
case OPEN_DELEGATE_NONE:
void;
case OPEN_DELEGATE_READ:
open_read_delegation4 read;
Expires: December 2002 [Page 147]
Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol July 2002
case OPEN_DELEGATE_WRITE:
open_write_delegation4 write;
};
const OPEN4_RESULT_MLOCK = 0x00000001;
const OPEN4_RESULT_CONFIRM= 0x00000002;
const OPEN4_RESULT_LOCKTYPE_POSIX = 0x00000004;
struct OPEN4resok {
stateid4 stateid; /* Stateid for open */
change_info4 cinfo; /* Directory Change Info */
uint32_t rflags; /* Result flags */
bitmap4 attrset; /* attributes on create */
open_delegation4 delegation; /* Info on any open
delegation */
};
union OPEN4res switch (nfsstat4 status) {
case NFS4_OK:
/* CURRENT_FH: opened file */
OPEN4resok resok4;
default:
void;
};
WARNING TO CLIENT IMPLEMENTORS
OPEN resembles LOOKUP in that it generates a filehandle for the
client to use. Unlike LOOKUP though, OPEN creates server state on
the filehandle. In normal circumstances, the client can only
release this state with a CLOSE operation. CLOSE uses the current
filehandle to determine which file to close. Therefore the client
MUST follow every OPEN operation with a GETFH operation in the same
COMPOUND procedure. This will supply the client with the
filehandle such that CLOSE can be used appropriately.
Simply waiting for the lease on the file to expire is insufficient
because the server may maintain the state indefinitely as long as
another client does not attempt to make a conflicting access to the
same file.
DESCRIPTION
The OPEN operation creates and/or opens a regular file in a
directory with the provided name. If the file does not exist at
the server and creation is desired, specification of the method of
creation is provided by the openhow parameter. The client has the
choice of three creation methods: UNCHECKED, GUARDED, or EXCLUSIVE.
UNCHECKED means that the file should be created if a file of that
Expires: December 2002 [Page 148]
Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol July 2002
name does not exist and encountering an existing regular file of
that name is not an error. For this type of create, createattrs
specifies the initial set of attributes for the file. The set of
attributes may include any writable attribute valid for regular
files. When an UNCHECKED create encounters an existing file, the
attributes specified by createattrs is not used, except that when
an size of zero is specified, the existing file is truncated. If
GUARDED is specified, the server checks for the presence of a
duplicate object by name before performing the create. If a
duplicate exists, an error of NFS4ERR_EXIST is returned as the
status. If the object does not exist, the request is performed as
described for UNCHECKED. For each of these cases (UNCHECKED and
GUARDED) where the operation is successful, the server will return
to the client an attribute mask signifying which attributes were
successfully set for the object.
EXCLUSIVE specifies that the server is to follow exclusive creation
semantics, using the verifier to ensure exclusive creation of the
target. The server should check for the presence of a duplicate
object by name. If the object does not exist, the server creates
the object and stores the verifier with the object. If the object
does exist and the stored verifier matches the client provided
verifier, the server uses the existing object as the newly created
object. If the stored verifier does not match, then an error of
NFS4ERR_EXIST is returned. No attributes may be provided in this
case, since the server may use an attribute of the target object to
store the verifier. If the server uses an attribute to store the
exclusive create verifier, it will signify which attribute by
setting the appropriate bit in the attribute mask that is returned
in the results.
For the target directory, the server returns change_info4
information in cinfo. With the atomic field of the change_info4
struct, the server will indicate if the before and after change
attributes were obtained atomically with respect to the link
creation.
Upon successful creation, the current filehandle is replaced by
that of the new object.
The OPEN procedure provides for DOS SHARE capability with the use
of the access and deny fields of the OPEN arguments. The client
specifies at OPEN the required access and deny modes. For clients
that do not directly support SHAREs (i.e. Unix), the expected deny
value is DENY_NONE. In the case that there is a existing SHARE
reservation that conflicts with the OPEN request, the server
returns the error NFS4ERR_DENIED. For a complete SHARE request,
the client must provide values for the owner and seqid fields for
the OPEN argument. For additional discussion of SHARE semantics
see the section on 'Share Reservations'.
In the case that the client is recovering state from a server
Expires: December 2002 [Page 149]
Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol July 2002
failure, the reclaim field of the OPEN argument is used to signify
that the request is meant to reclaim state previously held.
The "claim" field of the OPEN argument is used to specify the file
to be opened and the state information which the client claims to
possess. There are four basic claim types which cover the various
situations for an OPEN. They are as follows:
CLAIM_NULL
For the client, this is a new OPEN
request and there is no previous state
associate with the file for the client.
CLAIM_PREVIOUS
The client is claiming basic OPEN state
for a file that was held previous to a
server reboot. Generally used when a
server is returning persistent file
handles; the client may not have the
file name to reclaim the OPEN.
CLAIM_DELEGATE_CUR
The client is claiming a delegation for
OPEN as granted by the server.
Generally this is done as part of
recalling a delegation.
CLAIM_DELEGATE_PREV
The client is claiming a delegation
granted to a previous client instance;
used after the client reboots.
For OPEN requests whose claim type is other than CLAIM_PREVIOUS
(i.e. requests other than those devoted to reclaiming opens after a
server reboot) that reach the server during its grace or lease
expiration period, the server returns an error of NFS4ERR_GRACE.
For any OPEN request, the server may return an open delegation,
which allows further opens and closes to be handled locally on the
client as described in the section Open Delegation. Note that
delegation is up to the server to decide. The client should never
assume that delegation will or will not be granted in a particular
instance. It should always be prepared for either case. A partial
exception is the reclaim (CLAIM_PREVIOUS) case, in which a
delegation type is claimed. In this case, delegation will always
be granted, although the server may specify an immediate recall in
the delegation structure.
The rflags returned by a successful OPEN allow the server to return
information governing how the open file is to be handled.
OPEN4_RESULT_MLOCK indicates to the caller that mandatory locking
is in effect for this file and the client should act appropriately
with regard to data cached on the client. OPEN4_RESULT_CONFIRM
indicates that the client MUST execute an OPEN_CONFIRM operation
before using the open file. OPEN4_RESULT_LOCKTYPE_POSIX indicates
Expires: December 2002 [Page 150]
Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol July 2002
the server's file locking behavior is Posix like with respect to
lock range coalescing. From this the client can choose to manage
file locking state in a way to handle a mis-match of file locking
management.
If the component is of zero length or if the component does not
obey the UTF-8 definition, the error NFS4ERR_INVAL will be
returned.
When an OPEN is done and the specified lockowner already has the
resulting filehandle open, the result is to "OR" together the new
share and deny status together with the existing status. In this
case, only a single CLOSE need be done, even though multiple OPEN's
were completed.
If the underlying filesystem at the server is only accessible in a
read-only mode and the OPEN request has specified ACCESS_WRITE or
ACCESS_BOTH, the server will return NFS4ERR_ROFS to indicate a
read-only filesystem.
IMPLEMENTATION
The OPEN procedure contains support for EXCLUSIVE create. The
mechanism is similar to the support in NFS version 3 [RFC1813]. As
in NFS version 3, this mechanism provides reliable exclusive
creation. Exclusive create is invoked when the how parameter is
EXCLUSIVE. In this case, the client provides a verifier that can
reasonably be expected to be unique. A combination of a client
identifier, perhaps the client network address, and a unique number
generated by the client, perhaps the RPC transaction identifier,
may be appropriate.
If the object does not exist, the server creates the object and
stores the verifier in stable storage. For file systems that do not
provide a mechanism for the storage of arbitrary file attributes,
the server may use one or more elements of the object meta-data to
store the verifier. The verifier must be stored in stable storage
to prevent erroneous failure on retransmission of the request. It
is assumed that an exclusive create is being performed because
exclusive semantics are critical to the application. Because of the
expected usage, exclusive CREATE does not rely solely on the
normally volatile duplicate request cache for storage of the
verifier. The duplicate request cache in volatile storage does not
survive a crash and may actually flush on a long network partition,
opening failure windows. In the UNIX local file system
environment, the expected storage location for the verifier on
creation is the meta-data (time stamps) of the object. For this
reason, an exclusive object create may not include initial
attributes because the server would have nowhere to store the
verifier.
Expires: December 2002 [Page 151]
Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol July 2002
If the server can not support these exclusive create semantics,
possibly because of the requirement to commit the verifier to
stable storage, it should fail the OPEN request with the error,
NFS4ERR_NOTSUPP.
During an exclusive CREATE request, if the object already exists,
the server reconstructs the object's verifier and compares it with
the verifier in the request. If they match, the server treats the
request as a success. The request is presumed to be a duplicate of
an earlier, successful request for which the reply was lost and
that the server duplicate request cache mechanism did not detect.
If the verifiers do not match, the request is rejected with the
status, NFS4ERR_EXIST.
Once the client has performed a successful exclusive create, it
must issue a SETATTR to set the correct object attributes. Until
it does so, it should not rely upon any of the object attributes,
since the server implementation may need to overload object meta-
data to store the verifier. The subsequent SETATTR must not occur
in the same COMPOUND request as the OPEN. This separation will
guarantee that the exclusive create mechanism will continue to
function properly in the face of retransmission of the request.
Use of the GUARDED attribute does not provide exactly-once
semantics. In particular, if a reply is lost and the server does
not detect the retransmission of the request, the procedure can
fail with NFS4ERR_EXIST, even though the create was performed
successfully. The client would use this behavior in the case that
the application has not requested an exclusive create but has asked
to have the file truncated when the file is opened. In the case of
the client timing out and retransmitting the create request, the
client can use GUARDED to prevent against a sequence like: create,
write, create (retransmitted) from occurring.
For SHARE reservations, the client must specify a value for access
that is one of READ, WRITE, or BOTH. For deny, the client must
specify one of NONE, READ, WRITE, or BOTH. If the client fails to
do this, the server must return NFS4ERR_INVAL.
If the component provided to OPEN is a symbolic link, the error
NFS4ERR_SYMLINK will be returned to the client. If the current
filehandle is not a directory, the error NFS4ERR_NOTDIR will be
returned.
ERRORS
NFS4ERR_ACCESS
NFS4ERR_ATTRNOTSUPP
NFS4ERR_BAD_SEQID
NFS4ERR_BADXDR
NFS4ERR_DELAY
Expires: December 2002 [Page 152]
Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol July 2002
NFS4ERR_DQUOT
NFS4ERR_EXIST
NFS4ERR_EXPIRED
NFS4ERR_FHEXPIRED
NFS4ERR_GRACE
NFS4ERR_IO
NFS4ERR_ISDIR
NFS4ERR_LEASE_MOVED
NFS4ERR_MOVED
NFS4ERR_NAMETOOLONG
NFS4ERR_NOENT*
NFS4ERR_NOFILEHANDLE
NFS4ERR_NO_GRACE
NFS4ERR_NOSPC
NFS4ERR_NOTDIR
NFS4ERR_NOTSUPP
NFS4ERR_RECLAIM_BAD
NFS4ERR_RECLAIM_CONFLICT
NFS4ERR_RESOURCE
NFS4ERR_ROFS
NFS4ERR_SERVERFAULT
NFS4ERR_SHARE_DENIED
NFS4ERR_STALE_CLIENTID
NFS4ERR_SYMLINK
Expires: December 2002 [Page 153]
Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol July 2002
14.2.17. Operation 19: OPENATTR - Open Named Attribute Directory
SYNOPSIS
(cfh) createdir -> (cfh)
ARGUMENT
struct OPENATTR4args {
/* CURRENT_FH: object */
bool createdir;
};
RESULT
struct OPENATTR4res {
/* CURRENT_FH: named attr directory*/
nfsstat4 status;
};
DESCRIPTION
The OPENATTR operation is used to obtain the filehandle of the
named attribute directory associated with the current filehandle.
The result of the OPENATTR will be a filehandle to an object of
type NF4ATTRDIR. From this filehandle, READDIR and LOOKUP
procedures can be used to obtain filehandles for the various named
attributes associated with the original file system object.
Filehandles returned within the named attribute directory will have
a type of NF4NAMEDATTR.
The createdir argument allows the client to signify if a named
attribute directory should be created as a result of the OPENATTR
operation. Some clients may use the OPENATTR operation with a
value of FALSE for createdir to determine if any named attributes
exist for the object. If none exist, then NFS4ERR_NOENT will be
returned. If createdir has a value of TRUE and no named attribute
directory exists, one is created. The creation of a named
attribute directory assumes that the server has implemented named
attribute support in this fashion and is not required to do so by
this definition.
IMPLEMENTATION
If the server does not support named attributes for the current
filehandle, an error of NFS4ERR_NOTSUPP will be returned to the
client.
Expires: December 2002 [Page 154]
Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol July 2002
ERRORS
NFS4ERR_ACCESS
NFS4ERR_BADHANDLE
NFS4ERR_BADXDR
NFS4ERR_DELAY
NFS4ERR_ROFS
NFS4ERR_FHEXPIRED
NFS4ERR_INVAL
NFS4ERR_IO
NFS4ERR_MOVED
NFS4ERR_NOENT
NFS4ERR_NOFILEHANDLE
NFS4ERR_NOSPC
NFS4ERR_NOTSUPP
NFS4ERR_RESOURCE
NFS4ERR_SERVERFAULT
NFS4ERR_STALE
NFS4ERR_WRONGSEC
Expires: December 2002 [Page 155]
Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol July 2002
14.2.18. Operation 20: OPEN_CONFIRM - Confirm Open
SYNOPSIS
(cfh), seqid, stateid-> stateid
ARGUMENT
struct OPEN_CONFIRM4args {
/* CURRENT_FH: opened file */
seqid4 seqid;
stateid4 stateid;
};
RESULT
struct OPEN_CONFIRM4resok {
stateid4 stateid;
};
union OPEN_CONFIRM4res switch (nfsstat4 status) {
case NFS4_OK:
OPEN_CONFIRM4resok resok4;
default:
void;
};
DESCRIPTION
This operation is used to confirm the sequence id usage for the
first time that a nfs_lockowner is used by a client. The stateid
returned from the OPEN operation is used as the argument for this
operation along with the next sequence id for the nfs_lockowner.
The sequence id passed to the OPEN_CONFIRM must be 1 (one) greater
than the seqid passed to the OPEN operation from which the
open_confirm value was obtained. If the server receives an
unexpected sequence id with respect to the original open, then the
server assumes that the client will not confirm the original OPEN
and all state associated with the original OPEN is released by the
server.
On success, the current filehandle retains its value.
IMPLEMENTATION
A given client might generate many nfs_lockowner data structures
for a given clientid. The client will periodically either dispose
of its nfs_lockowners or stop using them for indefinite periods of
Expires: December 2002 [Page 156]
Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol July 2002
time. The latter situation is why the NFS version 4 protocol does
not have a an explicit operation to exit an nfs_lockowner: such an
operation is of no use in that situation. Instead, to avoid
unbounded memory use, the server needs to implement a strategy for
disposing of nfs_lockowners that have no current lock, open, or
delegation state for any files and have not been used recently.
The time period used to determine when to dispose of nfs_lockowners
is an implementation choice. The time period should certainly be
no less than the lease time plus any grace period the server wishes
to implement beyond a lease time. The OPEN_CONFIRM operation
allows the server to safely dispose of unused nfs_lockowner data
structures.
In the case that a client issues an OPEN operation and the server
no longer has a record of the nfs_lockowner, the server needs
ensure that this is a new OPEN and not a replay or retransmission.
A lazy server implementation might require confirmation for every
nfs_lockowner for which it has no record. However, this is not
necessary until the server records the fact that it has disposed of
one nfs_lockowner for the given clientid.
The server must hold unconfirmed OPEN state until one of three
events occur. First, the client sends an OPEN_CONFIRM request with
the appropriate sequence id and stateid within the lease period.
In this case, the OPEN state on the server goes to confirmed, and
the nfs_lockowner on the server is fully established.
Second, the client sends another OPEN request with a sequence id
that is incorrect for the nfs_lockowner (out of sequence). In this
case, the server assumes the second OPEN request is valid and the
first one is a replay. The server cancels the OPEN state of the
first OPEN request, establishes an unconfirmed OPEN state for the
second OPEN request, and responds to the second OPEN request with
an indication that an OPEN_CONFIRM is needed. The process then
repeats itself. While there is a potential for a denial of service
attack on the client, it is mitigated if the client and server
require the use of a security flavor based on Kerberos V5, LIPKEY,
or some other flavor that uses cryptography.
What if the server is in the unconfirmed OPEN state for a given
nfs_lockowner, and it receives an operation on the nfs_lockowner
that has a stateid but the operation is not OPEN, or it is
OPEN_CONFIRM but with the wrong stateid? Then, even if the seqid
is correct, the server returns NFS4ERR_BAD_STATEID, because the
server assumes the operation is a replay: if the server has no
established OPEN state, then there is no way, for example, a LOCK
operation could be valid.
Third, neither of the two aforementioned events occur for the
nfs_lockowner within the lease period. In this case, the OPEN
state is cancelled and disposal of the nfs_lockowner can occur.
Expires: December 2002 [Page 157]
Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol July 2002
ERRORS
NFS4ERR_BADHANDLE
NFS4ERR_BAD_SEQID
NFS4ERR_BADXDR
NFS4ERR_EXPIRED
NFS4ERR_FHEXPIRED
NFS4ERR_GRACE
NFS4ERR_INVAL
NFS4ERR_ISDIR
NFS4ERR_MOVED
NFS4ERR_NOENT
NFS4ERR_NOFILEHANDLE
NFS4ERR_NOTSUPP
NFS4ERR_RESOURCE
NFS4ERR_SERVERFAULT
NFS4ERR_STALE
NFS4ERR_WRONGSEC
Expires: December 2002 [Page 158]
Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol July 2002
14.2.19. Operation 21: OPEN_DOWNGRADE - Reduce Open File Access
SYNOPSIS
(cfh), stateid, seqid, access, deny -> stateid
ARGUMENT
struct OPEN_DOWNGRADE4args {
/* CURRENT_FH: opened file */
stateid4 stateid;
seqid4 seqid;
uint32_t share_access;
uint32_t share_deny;
};
RESULT
struct OPEN_DOWNGRADE4resok {
stateid4 stateid;
};
union OPEN_DOWNGRADE4res switch(nfsstat4 status) {
case NFS4_OK:
OPEN_DOWNGRADE4resok resok4;
default:
void;
};
This operation is used to adjust the access and deny bits for a given
open. This is necessary when a given lockowner opens the same file
multiple times with different access and deny flags. In this
situation, a close of one of the open's may change the appropriate
access and deny flags to remove bits associated with open's no longer
in effect.
The access and deny bits specified in this operation replace the
current ones for the specified open file. If either the access or
the deny mode specified includes bits not in effect for the open, the
error NFS4ERR_INVAL should be returned. Since access and deny bits
are subsets of those already granted, it is not possible for this
request to be denied because of conflicting share reservations.
On success, the current filehandle retains its value.
ERRORS
NFS4ERR_BADHANDLE
Expires: December 2002 [Page 159]
Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol July 2002
NFS4ERR_BAD_SEQID
NFS4ERR_BAD_STATEID
NFS4ERR_BADXDR
NFS4ERR_EXPIRED
NFS4ERR_FHEXPIRED
NFS4ERR_INVAL
NFS4ERR_MOVED
NFS4ERR_NOFILEHANDLE
NFS4ERR_OLD_STATEID
NFS4ERR_RESOURCE
NFS4ERR_SERVERFAULT
NFS4ERR_STALE
NFS4ERR_STALE_STATEID
Expires: December 2002 [Page 160]
Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol July 2002
14.2.20. Operation 22: PUTFH - Set Current Filehandle
SYNOPSIS
filehandle -> (cfh)
ARGUMENT
struct PUTFH4args {
nfs_fh4 object;
};
RESULT
struct PUTFH4res {
/* CURRENT_FH: */
nfsstat4 status;
};
DESCRIPTION
Replaces the current filehandle with the filehandle provided as an
argument.
IMPLEMENTATION
Commonly used as the first operator in an NFS request to set the
context for following operations.
ERRORS
NFS4ERR_BADHANDLE
NFS4ERR_BADXDR
NFS4ERR_FHEXPIRED
NFS4ERR_MOVED
NFS4ERR_RESOURCE
NFS4ERR_SERVERFAULT
NFS4ERR_STALE
NFS4ERR_WRONGSEC
Expires: December 2002 [Page 161]
Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol July 2002
14.2.21. Operation 23: PUTPUBFH - Set Public Filehandle
SYNOPSIS
- -> (cfh)
ARGUMENT
void;
RESULT
struct PUTPUBFH4res {
/* CURRENT_FH: public fh */
nfsstat4 status;
};
DESCRIPTION
Replaces the current filehandle with the filehandle that represents
the public filehandle of the server's name space. This filehandle
may be different from the "root" filehandle which may be associated
with some other directory on the server.
The public filehandle represents the concepts embodied in RFC 2054,
RFC 2055, RFC 2224. The intent for NFS version 4 is that the
public filehandle (represented by the PUTPUBFH operation) be used
as a method of providing WebNFS server compatibility with NFS
versions 2 and 3.
The public filehandle and the root filehandle (represented by the
PUTROOTFH operation) should be equivalent. If the public and root
filehandles are not equivalent, then the public filehandle MUST be
a descendant of the root filehandle.
IMPLEMENTATION
Used as the first operator in an NFS request to set the context for
following operations.
With the NFS version 2 and 3 public filehandle, the client is able
to specify whether the path name provided in the LOOKUP should be
evaluated as either an absolute path relative to the server's root
or relative to the public filehandle. RFC 2224 contains further
discussion of the functionality. With NFSv4, that type of
specification is not directly available in the LOOKUP operation.
The reason for this is because the component separators needed to
specify absolute vs. relative are not allowed in NFS version 4.
Expires: December 2002 [Page 162]
Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol July 2002
Therefore, the client is responsible for constructing its request
such that the use of either PUTROOTFH or PUTPUBFH are used to
signify absolute or relative evaluation of an NFS URL respectively.
Note that there are warnings mentioned in RFC 2224 with respect to
the use of absolute evaluation and the restrictions the server may
place on that evaluation with respect to how much of its namespace
has been made available. These same warnings apply to NFS version
4. It is likely, therefore that because of server implementation
details, an NFS version 3 absolute public filehandle lookup may
behave differently than an NFS version 4 absolute resolution.
There is a form of security negotiation as described in RFC 2755
that uses the public filehandle a method of employing SNEGO. This
method is not available with NFS version 4 as filehandles are not
overloaded with special meaning and therefore do not provide the
same framework as NFS versions 2 and 3. Clients should therefore
use the security negotiation mechanisms described in this RFC.
ERRORS
NFS4ERR_RESOURCE
NFS4ERR_SERVERFAULT
NFS4ERR_WRONGSEC
Expires: December 2002 [Page 163]
Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol July 2002
14.2.22. Operation 24: PUTROOTFH - Set Root Filehandle
SYNOPSIS
- -> (cfh)
ARGUMENT
void;
RESULT
struct PUTROOTFH4res {
/* CURRENT_FH: root fh */
nfsstat4 status;
};
DESCRIPTION
Replaces the current filehandle with the filehandle that represents
the root of the server's name space. From this filehandle a LOOKUP
operation can locate any other filehandle on the server. This
filehandle may be different from the "public" filehandle which may
be associated with some other directory on the server.
IMPLEMENTATION
Commonly used as the first operator in an NFS request to set the
context for following operations.
ERRORS
NFS4ERR_RESOURCE
NFS4ERR_SERVERFAULT
NFS4ERR_WRONGSEC
Expires: December 2002 [Page 164]
Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol July 2002
14.2.23. Operation 25: READ - Read from File
SYNOPSIS
(cfh), stateid, offset, count -> eof, data
ARGUMENT
struct READ4args {
/* CURRENT_FH: file */
stateid4 stateid;
offset4 offset;
count4 count;
};
RESULT
struct READ4resok {
bool eof;
opaque data<>;
};
union READ4res switch (nfsstat4 status) {
case NFS4_OK:
READ4resok resok4;
default:
void;
};
DESCRIPTION
The READ operation reads data from the regular file identified by
the current filehandle.
The client provides an offset of where the READ is to start and a
count of how many bytes are to be read. An offset of 0 (zero)
means to read data starting at the beginning of the file. If
offset is greater than or equal to the size of the file, the
status, NFS4_OK, is returned with a data length set to 0 (zero) and
eof is set to TRUE. The READ is subject to access permissions
checking.
If the client specifies a count value of 0 (zero), the READ
succeeds and returns 0 (zero) bytes of data again subject to access
permissions checking. The server may choose to return fewer bytes
than specified by the client. The client needs to check for this
condition and handle the condition appropriately.
The stateid value for a READ request represents a value returned
Expires: December 2002 [Page 165]
Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol July 2002
from a previous record lock or share reservation request. Used by
the server to verify that the associated lock is still valid and to
update lease timeouts for the client.
If the read ended at the end-of-file (formally, in a correctly
formed READ request, if offset + count is equal to the size of the
file), or the read request extends beyond the size of the file (if
offset + count is greater than the size of the file), eof is
returned as TRUE; otherwise it is FALSE. A successful READ of an
empty file will always return eof as TRUE.
If the current filehandle is not a regular file, an error will be
returned to the client. In the case the current filehandle
represents a directory, NFS4ERR_ISDIR is return; otherwise,
NFS4ERR_INVAL is returned.
On success, the current filehandle retains its value.
IMPLEMENTATION
It is possible for the server to return fewer than count bytes of
data. If the server returns less than the count requested and eof
set to FALSE, the client should issue another READ to get the
remaining data. A server may return less data than requested under
several circumstances. The file may have been truncated by another
client or perhaps on the server itself, changing the file size from
what the requesting client believes to be the case. This would
reduce the actual amount of data available to the client. It is
possible that the server may back off the transfer size and reduce
the read request return. Server resource exhaustion may also occur
necessitating a smaller read return.
If the file is locked the server will return an NFS4ERR_LOCKED
error. Since the lock may be of short duration, the client may
choose to retransmit the READ request (with exponential backoff)
until the operation succeeds.
ERRORS
NFS4ERR_ACCESS
NFS4ERR_BADHANDLE
NFS4ERR_BAD_STATEID
NFS4ERR_BADXDR
NFS4ERR_DELAY
NFS4ERR_EXPIRED
NFS4ERR_FHEXPIRED
NFS4ERR_GRACE
NFS4ERR_INVAL
NFS4ERR_IO
NFS4ERR_ISDIR
Expires: December 2002 [Page 166]
Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol July 2002
NFS4ERR_LEASE_MOVED
NFS4ERR_LOCKED
NFS4ERR_MOVED
NFS4ERR_NOFILEHANDLE
NFS4ERR_NXIO
NFS4ERR_OLD_STATEID
NFS4ERR_OPENMODE
NFS4ERR_RESOURCE
NFS4ERR_SERVERFAULT
NFS4ERR_STALE
NFS4ERR_STALE_STATEID
NFS4ERR_WRONGSEC
Expires: December 2002 [Page 167]
Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol July 2002
14.2.24. Operation 26: READDIR - Read Directory
SYNOPSIS
(cfh), cookie, cookieverf, dircount, maxcount, attr_request ->
cookieverf { cookie, name, attrs }
ARGUMENT
struct READDIR4args {
/* CURRENT_FH: directory */
nfs_cookie4 cookie;
verifier4 cookieverf;
count4 dircount;
count4 maxcount;
bitmap4 attr_request;
};
RESULT
struct entry4 {
nfs_cookie4 cookie;
component4 name;
fattr4 attrs;
entry4 *nextentry;
};
struct dirlist4 {
entry4 *entries;
bool eof;
};
struct READDIR4resok {
verifier4 cookieverf;
dirlist4 reply;
};
union READDIR4res switch (nfsstat4 status) {
case NFS4_OK:
READDIR4resok resok4;
default:
void;
};
DESCRIPTION
The READDIR operation retrieves a variable number of entries from a
file system directory and returns client requested attributes for
each entry along with information to allow the client to request
Expires: December 2002 [Page 168]
Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol July 2002
additional directory entries in a subsequent READDIR.
The arguments contain a cookie value that represents where the
READDIR should start within the directory. A value of 0 (zero) for
the cookie is used to start reading at the beginning of the
directory. For subsequent READDIR requests, the client specifies a
cookie value that is provided by the server on a previous READDIR
request.
The cookieverf value should be set to 0 (zero) when the cookie
value is 0 (zero) (first directory read). On subsequent requests,
it should be a cookieverf as returned by the server. The
cookieverf must match that returned by the READDIR in which the
cookie was acquired.
The dircount portion of the argument is a hint of the maximum
number of bytes of directory information that should be returned.
This value represents the length of the names of the directory
entries and the cookie value for these entries. This length
represents the XDR encoding of the data (names and cookies) and not
the length in the native format of the server. The server may
return less data.
The maxcount value of the argument is the maximum number of bytes
for the result. This maximum size represents all of the data being
returned and includes the XDR overhead. The server may return less
data. If the server is unable to return a single directory entry
within the maxcount limit, the error NFS4ERR_READDIR_NOSPC will be
returned to the client.
Finally, attrbits represents the list of attributes to be returned
for each directory entry supplied by the server.
On successful return, the server's response will provide a list of
directory entries. Each of these entries contains the name of the
directory entry, a cookie value for that entry, and the associated
attributes as requested.
The cookie value is only meaningful to the server and is used as a
"bookmark" for the directory entry. As mentioned, this cookie is
used by the client for subsequent READDIR operations so that it may
continue reading a directory. The cookie is similar in concept to
a READ offset but should not be interpreted as such by the client.
Ideally, the cookie value should not change if the directory is
modified since the client may be caching these values.
In some cases, the server may encounter an error while obtaining
the attributes for a directory entry. Instead of returning an
error for the entire READDIR operation, the server can instead
return the attribute 'fattr4_rdattr_error'. With this, the server
is able to communicate the failure to the client and not fail the
entire operation in the instance of what might be a transient
Expires: December 2002 [Page 169]
Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol July 2002
failure. Obviously, the client must request the
fattr4_rdattr_error attribute for this method to work properly. If
the client does not request the attribute, the server has no choice
but to return failure for the entire READDIR operation.
For some file system environments, the directory entries "." and
".." have special meaning and in other environments, they may not.
If the server supports these special entries within a directory,
they should not be returned to the client as part of the READDIR
response. To enable some client environments, the cookie values of
0, 1, and 2 are to be considered reserved. Note that the Unix
client will use these values when combining the server's response
and local representations to enable a fully formed Unix directory
presentation to the application.
For READDIR arguments, cookie values of 1 and 2 should not be used
and for READDIR results cookie values of 0, 1, and 2 should not
returned.
On success, the current filehandle retains its value.
IMPLEMENTATION
The server's file system directory representations can differ
greatly. A client's programming interfaces may also be bound to
the local operating environment in a way that does not translate
well into the NFS protocol. Therefore the use of the dircount and
maxcount fields are provided to allow the client the ability to
provide guidelines to the server. If the client is aggressive
about attribute collection during a READDIR, the server has an idea
of how to limit the encoded response. The dircount field provides
a hint on the number of entries based solely on the names of the
directory entries. Since it is a hint, it may be possible that a
dircount value is zero. In this case, the server is free to ignore
the dircount value and return directory information based on the
specified maxcount value.
The cookieverf may be used by the server to help manage cookie
values that may become stale. It should be a rare occurrence that
a server is unable to continue properly reading a directory with
the provided cookie/cookieverf pair. The server should make every
effort to avoid this condition since the application at the client
may not be able to properly handle this type of failure.
The use of the cookieverf will also protect the client from using
READDIR cookie values that may be stale. For example, if the file
system has been migrated, the server may or may not be able to use
the same cookie values to service READDIR as the previous server
used. With the client providing the cookieverf, the server is able
to provide the appropriate response to the client. This prevents
the case where the server may accept a cookie value but the
Expires: December 2002 [Page 170]
Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol July 2002
underlying directory has changed and the response is invalid from
the client's context of its previous READDIR.
Since some servers will not be returning "." and ".." entries as
has been done with previous versions of the NFS protocol, the
client that requires these entries be present in READDIR responses
must fabricate them.
ERRORS
NFS4ERR_ACCESS
NFS4ERR_BADHANDLE
NFS4ERR_BAD_COOKIE
NFS4ERR_BADXDR
NFS4ERR_DELAY
NFS4ERR_FHEXPIRED
NFS4ERR_INVAL
NFS4ERR_IO
NFS4ERR_MOVED
NFS4ERR_NOFILEHANDLE
NFS4ERR_NOTDIR
NFS4ERR_NOTSUPP
NFS4ERR_READDIR_NOSPC
NFS4ERR_RESOURCE
NFS4ERR_SERVERFAULT
NFS4ERR_STALE
NFS4ERR_TOOSMALL
NFS4ERR_WRONGSEC
Expires: December 2002 [Page 171]
Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol July 2002
14.2.25. Operation 27: READLINK - Read Symbolic Link
SYNOPSIS
(cfh) -> linktext
ARGUMENT
/* CURRENT_FH: symlink */
void;
RESULT
struct READLINK4resok {
linktext4 link;
};
union READLINK4res switch (nfsstat4 status) {
case NFS4_OK:
READLINK4resok resok4;
default:
void;
};
DESCRIPTION
READLINK reads the data associated with a symbolic link. The data
is a UTF-8 string that is opaque to the server. That is, whether
created by an NFS client or created locally on the server, the data
in a symbolic link is not interpreted when created, but is simply
stored.
On success, the current filehandle retains its value.
IMPLEMENTATION
A symbolic link is nominally a pointer to another file. The data
is not necessarily interpreted by the server, just stored in the
file. It is possible for a client implementation to store a path
name that is not meaningful to the server operating system in a
symbolic link. A READLINK operation returns the data to the client
for interpretation. If different implementations want to share
access to symbolic links, then they must agree on the
interpretation of the data in the symbolic link.
The READLINK operation is only allowed on objects of type NF4LNK.
The server should return the error, NFS4ERR_INVAL, if the object is
not of type, NF4LNK.
Expires: December 2002 [Page 172]
Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol July 2002
ERRORS
NFS4ERR_ACCESS
NFS4ERR_BADHANDLE
NFS4ERR_DELAY
NFS4ERR_FHEXPIRED
NFS4ERR_INVAL
NFS4ERR_IO
NFS4ERR_MOVED
NFS4ERR_NOFILEHANDLE
NFS4ERR_NOTSUPP
NFS4ERR_RESOURCE
NFS4ERR_SERVERFAULT
NFS4ERR_STALE
NFS4ERR_WRONGSEC
Expires: December 2002 [Page 173]
Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol July 2002
14.2.26. Operation 28: REMOVE - Remove Filesystem Object
SYNOPSIS
(cfh), filename -> change_info
ARGUMENT
struct REMOVE4args {
/* CURRENT_FH: directory */
component4 target;
};
RESULT
struct REMOVE4resok {
change_info4 cinfo;
}
union REMOVE4res switch (nfsstat4 status) {
case NFS4_OK:
REMOVE4resok resok4;
default:
void;
}
DESCRIPTION
The REMOVE operation removes (deletes) a directory entry named by
filename from the directory corresponding to the current
filehandle. If the entry in the directory was the last reference
to the corresponding file system object, the object may be
destroyed.
For the directory where the filename was removed, the server
returns change_info4 information in cinfo. With the atomic field
of the change_info4 struct, the server will indicate if the before
and after change attributes were obtained atomically with respect
to the removal.
If the target has a length of 0 (zero), or if target does not obey
the UTF-8 definition, the error NFS4ERR_INVAL will be returned.
On success, the current filehandle retains its value.
IMPLEMENTATION
NFS versions 2 and 3 required a different operator RMDIR for
Expires: December 2002 [Page 174]
Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol July 2002
directory removal. NFS version 4 REMOVE can be used to delete any
directory entry independent of its file type.
The concept of last reference is server specific. However, if the
numlinks field in the previous attributes of the object had the
value 1, the client should not rely on referring to the object via
a file handle. Likewise, the client should not rely on the
resources (disk space, directory entry, and so on) formerly
associated with the object becoming immediately available. Thus, if
a client needs to be able to continue to access a file after using
REMOVE to remove it, the client should take steps to make sure that
the file will still be accessible. The usual mechanism used is to
RENAME the file from its old name to a new hidden name.
ERRORS
NFS4ERR_ACCESS
NFS4ERR_BADHANDLE
NFS4ERR_BADXDR
NFS4ERR_DELAY
NFS4ERR_FHEXPIRED
NFS4ERR_INVAL
NFS4ERR_IO
NFS4ERR_MOVED
NFS4ERR_NAMETOOLONG
NFS4ERR_NOENT
NFS4ERR_NOFILEHANDLE
NFS4ERR_NOTDIR
NFS4ERR_NOTEMPTY
NFS4ERR_NOTSUPP
NFS4ERR_RESOURCE
NFS4ERR_ROFS
NFS4ERR_SERVERFAULT
NFS4ERR_STALE
NFS4ERR_WRONGSEC
Expires: December 2002 [Page 175]
Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol July 2002
14.2.27. Operation 29: RENAME - Rename Directory Entry
SYNOPSIS
(sfh), oldname, (cfh), newname -> source_change_info,
target_change_info
ARGUMENT
struct RENAME4args {
/* SAVED_FH: source directory */
component4 oldname;
/* CURRENT_FH: target directory */
component4 newname;
};
RESULT
struct RENAME4resok {
change_info4 source_cinfo;
change_info4 target_cinfo;
};
union RENAME4res switch (nfsstat4 status) {
case NFS4_OK:
RENAME4resok resok4;
default:
void;
};
DESCRIPTION
The RENAME operation renames the object identified by oldname in
the source directory corresponding to the saved filehandle, as set
by the SAVEFH operation, to newname in the target directory
corresponding to the current filehandle. The operation is required
to be atomic to the client. Source and target directories must
reside on the same file system on the server. On success, the
current filehandle will continue to be the target directory.
If the target directory already contains an entry with the name,
newname, the source object must be compatible with the target:
either both are non-directories or both are directories and the
target must be empty. If compatible, the existing target is
removed before the rename occurs. If they are not compatible or if
the target is a directory but not empty, the server will return the
error, NFS4ERR_EXIST.
If oldname and newname both refer to the same file (they might be
Expires: December 2002 [Page 176]
Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol July 2002
hard links of each other), then RENAME should perform no action and
return success.
For both directories involved in the RENAME, the server returns
change_info4 information. With the atomic field of the
change_info4 struct, the server will indicate if the before and
after change attributes were obtained atomically with respect to
the rename.
If the oldname refers to a named attribute and the saved and
current filehandles refer to different filesystem objects, the
server will return NFS4ERR_XDEV just as if the saved and current
filehandles represented directories on different filesystems.
If the oldname or newname has a length of 0 (zero), or if oldname
or newname does not obey the UTF-8 definition, the error
NFS4ERR_INVAL will be returned.
IMPLEMENTATION
The RENAME operation must be atomic to the client. The statement
"source and target directories must reside on the same file system
on the server" means that the fsid fields in the attributes for the
directories are the same. If they reside on different file systems,
the error, NFS4ERR_XDEV, is returned.
A filehandle may or may not become stale or expire on a rename.
However, server implementors are strongly encouraged to attempt to
keep file handles from becoming stale or expiring in this fashion.
On some servers, the filenames, "." and "..", are illegal as either
oldname or newname. In addition, neither oldname nor newname can
be an alias for the source directory. These servers will return
the error, NFS4ERR_INVAL, in these cases.
If either of the source or target filehandles are not directories,
the server will return NFS4ERR_NOTDIR.
ERRORS
NFS4ERR_ACCESS
NFS4ERR_BADHANDLE
NFS4ERR_BADXDR
NFS4ERR_DELAY
NFS4ERR_DQUOT
NFS4ERR_EXIST
NFS4ERR_FHEXPIRED
NFS4ERR_INVAL
NFS4ERR_IO
Expires: December 2002 [Page 177]
Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol July 2002
NFS4ERR_MOVED
NFS4ERR_NAMETOOLONG
NFS4ERR_NOENT
NFS4ERR_NOFILEHANDLE
NFS4ERR_NOSPC
NFS4ERR_NOTDIR
NFS4ERR_NOTEMPTY
NFS4ERR_NOTSUPP
NFS4ERR_RESOURCE
NFS4ERR_ROFS
NFS4ERR_SERVERFAULT
NFS4ERR_STALE
NFS4ERR_WRONGSEC
NFS4ERR_XDEV
Expires: December 2002 [Page 178]
Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol July 2002
14.2.28. Operation 30: RENEW - Renew a Lease
SYNOPSIS
clientid -> ()
ARGUMENT
struct RENEW4args {
clientid4clientid;
};
RESULT
struct RENEW4res {
nfsstat4 status;
};
DESCRIPTION
The RENEW operation is used by the client to renew leases which it
currently holds at a server. In processing the RENEW request, the
server renews all leases associated with the client. The
associated leases are determined by the clientid provided via the
SETCLIENTID procedure.
IMPLEMENTATION
ERRORS
NFS4ERR_BADXDR
NFS4ERR_EXPIRED
NFS4ERR_GRACE
NFS4ERR_INVAL
NFS4ERR_LEASE_MOVED
NFS4ERR_MOVED
NFS4ERR_RESOURCE
NFS4ERR_SERVERFAULT
NFS4ERR_STALE_CLIENTID
NFS4ERR_WRONGSEC
Expires: December 2002 [Page 179]
Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol July 2002
14.2.29. Operation 31: RESTOREFH - Restore Saved Filehandle
SYNOPSIS
(sfh) -> (cfh)
ARGUMENT
/* SAVED_FH: */
void;
RESULT
struct RESTOREFH4res {
/* CURRENT_FH: value of saved fh */
nfsstat4 status;
};
DESCRIPTION
Set the current filehandle to the value in the saved filehandle.
If there is no saved filehandle then return an error
NFS4ERR_NOFILEHANDLE.
IMPLEMENTATION
Operations like OPEN and LOOKUP use the current filehandle to
represent a directory and replace it with a new filehandle.
Assuming the previous filehandle was saved with a SAVEFH operator,
the previous filehandle can be restored as the current filehandle.
This is commonly used to obtain post-operation attributes for the
directory, e.g.
PUTFH (directory filehandle)
SAVEFH
GETATTR attrbits (pre-op dir attrs)
CREATE optbits "foo" attrs
GETATTR attrbits (file attributes)
RESTOREFH
GETATTR attrbits (post-op dir attrs)
ERRORS
NFS4ERR_BADHANDLE
NFS4ERR_FHEXPIRED
NFS4ERR_MOVED
Expires: December 2002 [Page 180]
Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol July 2002
NFS4ERR_NOFILEHANDLE
NFS4ERR_RESOURCE
NFS4ERR_SERVERFAULT
NFS4ERR_STALE
NFS4ERR_WRONGSEC
Expires: December 2002 [Page 181]
Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol July 2002
14.2.30. Operation 32: SAVEFH - Save Current Filehandle
SYNOPSIS
(cfh) -> (sfh)
ARGUMENT
/* CURRENT_FH: */
void;
RESULT
struct SAVEFH4res {
/* SAVED_FH: value of current fh */
nfsstat4 status;
};
DESCRIPTION
Save the current filehandle. If a previous filehandle was saved
then it is no longer accessible. The saved filehandle can be
restored as the current filehandle with the RESTOREFH operator.
On success, the current filehandle retains its value.
IMPLEMENTATION
ERRORS
NFS4ERR_BADHANDLE
NFS4ERR_FHEXPIRED
NFS4ERR_MOVED
NFS4ERR_NOFILEHANDLE
NFS4ERR_RESOURCE
NFS4ERR_SERVERFAULT
NFS4ERR_STALE
NFS4ERR_WRONGSEC
Expires: December 2002 [Page 182]
Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol July 2002
14.2.31. Operation 33: SECINFO - Obtain Available Security
SYNOPSIS
(cfh), name -> { secinfo }
ARGUMENT
struct SECINFO4args {
/* CURRENT_FH: directory */
component4 name;
};
RESULT
enum rpc_gss_svc_t {
RPC_GSS_SVC_NONE = 1,
RPC_GSS_SVC_INTEGRITY = 2,
RPC_GSS_SVC_PRIVACY = 3
};
struct rpcsec_gss_info {
sec_oid4 oid;
qop4 qop;
rpc_gss_svc_t service;
};
union secinfo4 switch (uint32_t flavor) {
case RPCSEC_GSS:
rpcsec_gss_info flavor_info;
default:
void;
};
typedef secinfo4 SECINFO4resok<>;
union SECINFO4res switch (nfsstat4 status) {
case NFS4_OK:
SECINFO4resok resok4;
default:
void;
};
DESCRIPTION
The SECINFO operation is used by the client to obtain a list of
valid RPC authentication flavors for a specific directory
filehandle, file name pair. The result will contain an array which
Expires: December 2002 [Page 183]
Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol July 2002
represents the security mechanisms available. The array entries
are represented by the secinfo4 structure. The field 'flavor' will
contain a value of AUTH_NONE, AUTH_SYS (as defined in [RFC1831]),
or RPCSEC_GSS (as defined in [RFC2203]).
For the flavors AUTH_NONE and AUTH_SYS, no additional security
information is returned. For a return value of RPCSEC_GSS, a
security triple is returned that contains the mechanism object id
(as defined in [RFC2078]), the quality of protection (as defined in
[RFC2078]) and the service type (as defined in [RFC2203]). It is
possible for SECINFO to return multiple entries with flavor equal
to RPCSEC_GSS with different security triple values.
On success, the current filehandle retains its value.
If the name has a length of 0 (zero), or if name does not obey the
UTF-8 definition, the error NFS4ERR_INVAL will be returned.
IMPLEMENTATION
The SECINFO operation is expected to be used by the NFS client when
the error value of NFS4ERR_WRONGSEC is returned from another NFS
operation. This signifies to the client that the server's security
policy is different from what the client is currently using. At
this point, the client is expected to obtain a list of possible
security flavors and choose what best suits its policies.
It is recommended that the client issue the SECINFO call protected
by a security triple that uses either rpc_gss_svc_integrity or
rpc_gss_svc_privacy service. The use of rpc_gss_svc_none would
allow an attacker in the middle to modify the SECINFO results such
that the client might select a weaker algorithm in the set allowed
by server, making the client and/or server vulnerable to further
attacks.
ERRORS
NFS4ERR_ACCESS
NFS4ERR_BADHANDLE
NFS4ERR_BADXDR
NFS4ERR_FHEXPIRED
NFS4ERR_INVAL
NFS4ERR_MOVED
NFS4ERR_NAMETOOLONG
NFS4ERR_NOENT
NFS4ERR_NOFILEHANDLE
NFS4ERR_NOTDIR
NFS4ERR_RESOURCE
NFS4ERR_SERVERFAULT
NFS4ERR_STALE
Expires: December 2002 [Page 184]
Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol July 2002
NFS4ERR_WRONGSEC
Expires: December 2002 [Page 185]
Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol July 2002
14.2.32. Operation 34: SETATTR - Set Attributes
SYNOPSIS
(cfh), stateid, attrmask, attr_vals -> attrsset
ARGUMENT
struct SETATTR4args {
/* CURRENT_FH: target object */
stateid4 stateid;
fattr4 obj_attributes;
};
RESULT
struct SETATTR4res {
nfsstat4 status;
bitmap4 attrsset;
};
DESCRIPTION
The SETATTR operation changes one or more of the attributes of a
file system object. The new attributes are specified with a bitmap
and the attributes that follow the bitmap in bit order.
The stateid argument for SETATTR is used to provide file locking
context that is necessary for SETATTR requests that set the size
attribute. Since setting the size attribute modifies the file's
data, it has the same locking requirements as a corresponding
WRITE. Any SETATTR that sets the size attribute is incompatible
with a share lock that specifies DENY_WRITE. The area between the
old end-of-file and the new end-of-file is considered to be
modified just as would have been the case had the area in question
been specified as the target of WRITE, for the purpose of checking
conflicts with record locks, for those cases in which a server is
implementing mandatory record locking behavior. A valid stateid
should always be specified. When the file size attribute is not
set, the special stateid consisting of all bits zero should be
passed.
On either success or failure of the operation, the server will
return the attrsset bitmask to represent what (if any) attributes
were successfully set. The attrsset in the response is a subset of
the bitmap4 that is part of the obj_attributes in the argument.
On success, the current filehandle retains its value.
Expires: December 2002 [Page 186]
Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol July 2002
IMPLEMENTATION
If the request specifies the owner attribute to be set, the server
should allow the operation to succeed if the current owner of the
object matches the value specified in the request. Some servers
may be implemented in a way as to prohibit the setting of the owner
attribute unless the requestor has privilege to do so. If the
server is lenient in this one case of matching owner values, the
client implementation may be simplified in cases of creation of an
object followed by a SETATTR.
The file size attribute is used to request changes to the size of a
file. A value of 0 (zero) causes the file to be truncated, a value
less than the current size of the file causes data from new size to
the end of the file to be discarded, and a size greater than the
current size of the file causes logically zeroed data bytes to be
added to the end of the file. Servers are free to implement this
using holes or actual zero data bytes. Clients should not make any
assumptions regarding a server's implementation of this feature,
beyond that the bytes returned will be zeroed. Servers must
support extending the file size via SETATTR.
SETATTR is not guaranteed atomic. A failed SETATTR may partially
change a file's attributes.
Changing the size of a file with SETATTR indirectly changes the
time_modify. A client must account for this as size changes can
result in data deletion.
The attributes time_access_set and time_modify_set are write-only
attributes constructed as a switched union so the client can direct
the server in setting the time values. If the switched union
specifies SET_TO_CLIENT_TIME4, the client has provided an nfstime4
to be used for the operation. If the switch union does not specify
SET_TO_CLIENT_TIME4, the server is to use its current time for the
SETATTR operation.
If server and client times differ, programs that compare client
time to file times can break. A time maintenance protocol should be
used to limit client/server time skew.
Use of a COMPOUND containing a VERIFY operation specifying only the
time_metadata attribute, immediately followed by a SETATTR,
provides a means whereby a client may specify a request that
emulates the functionality of the SETATTR guard mechanism of NFS
version 3. Since the function of the guard mechanism is to avoid
changes to the file attributes based on stale information, delays
between checking of the guard condition and the setting of the
attributes have the potential to compromise this function, as would
the corresponding delay in the NFS version 4 emulation. Therefore,
NFS version 4 servers should take care to avoid such delays, to the
degree possible, when executing such a request.
Expires: December 2002 [Page 187]
Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol July 2002
If the server does not support an attribute as requested by the
client, the server should return NFS4ERR_ATTRNOTSUPP.
A mask of the attibutes actually set is returned by SETATTR in all
cases. That mask must not include attributes bits not requested to
be set by the client, and must be equal to the mask of attributes
requested to be set only if the SETATTR completes without error.
ERRORS
NFS4ERR_ACCESS
NFS4ERR_ATTRNOTSUPP
NFS4ERR_BADHANDLE
NFS4ERR_BAD_STATEID
NFS4ERR_BADXDR
NFS4ERR_DELAY
NFS4ERR_DQUOT
NFS4ERR_EXPIRED
NFS4ERR_FBIG
NFS4ERR_FHEXPIRED
NFS4ERR_GRACE
NFS4ERR_INVAL
NFS4ERR_IO
NFS4ERR_ISDIR
NFS4ERR_LOCKED
NFS4ERR_MOVED
NFS4ERR_NOFILEHANDLE
NFS4ERR_NOSPC
NFS4ERR_NOTSUPP
NFS4ERR_OLD_STATEID
NFS4ERR_OPENMODE
NFS4ERR_PERM
NFS4ERR_RESOURCE
NFS4ERR_ROFS
NFS4ERR_SERVERFAULT
NFS4ERR_STALE
NFS4ERR_STALE_STATEID
NFS4ERR_WRONGSEC
Expires: December 2002 [Page 188]
Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol July 2002
14.2.33. Operation 35: SETCLIENTID - Negotiate Clientid
SYNOPSIS
client, callback -> clientid
ARGUMENT
struct SETCLIENTID4args {
nfs_client_id4 client;
cb_client4 callback;
uint32_t callback_ident;
};
RESULT
struct SETCLIENTID4resok {
clientid4 clientid;
};
union SETCLIENTID4res switch (nfsstat4 status) {
case NFS4_OK:
SETCLIENTID4resok resok4;
case NFS4ERR_CLID_INUSE:
clientaddr4 client_using;
default:
void;
};
DESCRIPTION
The SETCLIENTID operation introduces the ability of the client to
notify the server of its intention to use a particular client
identifier and verifier pair. Upon successful completion the
server will return a clientid which is used in subsequent file
locking requests and for a confirmation step. The client will use
the SETCLIENTID_CONFIRM operation to return the clientid, as a
verifier, to the server. At that point, the client may use the
clientid in subsequent operations that require an nfs_lockowner.
The callback information provided in this operation will be used if
the client is provided an open delegation at a future point.
Therefore, the client must correctly reflect the program and port
numbers for the callback program at the time SETCLIENTID is used.
The callback_ident value is used by the server on the callback.
The client can use the callback_ident as a method of use a single
callback RPC program number while still being able to determine
which server is initiating the callback.
Expires: December 2002 [Page 189]
Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol July 2002
IMPLEMENTATION
The server takes the verifier and client identification supplied in
the nfs_client_id4 and searches for a match of the client
identification. If no match is found the server saves the
principal/uid information along with the verifier and client
identification and returns a unique clientid that is used as a
shorthand reference to the supplied information.
If the server finds a matching client identification, the server
will only assign a new clientid if the principal/uid matches the
original entry. This is to protect against rogue clients
attempting to release client state indiscriminately at the server.
The principal, or principal to user-identifier mapping is taken
from the credential presented in the RPC. As mentioned, the server
will use the credential and associated principal for the matching
with existing clientids. If the client is a traditional host-based
client like a Unix NFS client, then the credential presented may be
the host credential. If the client is a user level client or
lightweight client, the credential used may be the end user's
credential. The client should take care in choosing an appropriate
credential since denial of service attacks could be attempted by a
rogue client that has access to the credential.
ERRORS
NFS4ERR_BADXDR
NFS4ERR_CLID_INUSE
NFS4ERR_INVAL
NFS4ERR_RESOURCE
NFS4ERR_SERVERFAULT
Expires: December 2002 [Page 190]
Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol July 2002
14.2.34. Operation 36: SETCLIENTID_CONFIRM - Confirm Clientid
SYNOPSIS
clientid -> -
ARGUMENT
struct SETCLIENTID_CONFIRM4args {
clientid4 clientid;
};
RESULT
struct SETCLIENTID_CONFIRM4res {
nfsstat4 status;
};
DESCRIPTION
This operation is used by the client to confirm the results from a
previous call to SETCLIENTID. The client provides the server
supplied (from a SETCLIENTID response) clientid. The server
responds with a simple status of success or failure.
IMPLEMENTATION
The client must use the SETCLIENTID_CONFIRM operation to confirm
its use of client identifier. If the server is holding state for a
client which has presented a new verifier via SETCLIENTID, then the
state will not be released, as described in the section "Client
Failure and Recovery", until a valid SETCLIENTID_CONFIRM is
received. Upon successful confirmation the server will release the
previous state held on behalf of the client.
ERRORS
NFS4ERR_BADXDR
NFS4ERR_CLID_INUSE
NFS4ERR_INVAL
NFS4ERR_RESOURCE
NFS4ERR_SERVERFAULT
NFS4ERR_STALE_CLIENTID
Expires: December 2002 [Page 191]
Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol July 2002
14.2.35. Operation 37: VERIFY - Verify Same Attributes
SYNOPSIS
(cfh), fattr -> -
ARGUMENT
struct VERIFY4args {
/* CURRENT_FH: object */
fattr4 obj_attributes;
};
RESULT
struct VERIFY4res {
nfsstat4 status;
};
DESCRIPTION
The VERIFY operation is used to verify that attributes have a value
assumed by the client before proceeding with following operations
in the compound request. If any of the attributes do not match
then the error NFS4ERR_NOT_SAME must be returned. The current
filehandle retains its value after successful completion of the
operation.
IMPLEMENTATION
One possible use of the VERIFY operation is the following compound
sequence. With this the client is attempting to verify that the
file being removed will match what the client expects to be
removed. This sequence can help prevent the unintended deletion of
a file.
PUTFH (directory filehandle)
LOOKUP (file name)
VERIFY (filehandle == fh)
PUTFH (directory filehandle)
REMOVE (file name)
This sequence does not prevent a second client from removing and
creating a new file in the middle of this sequence but it does help
avoid the unintended result.
In the case that a recommended attribute is specified in the VERIFY
operation and the server does not support that attribute for the
file system object, the error NFS4ERR_NOTSUPP is returned to the
Expires: December 2002 [Page 192]
Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol July 2002
client.
ERRORS
NFS4ERR_ACCESS
NFS4ERR_ATTRNOTSUPP
NFS4ERR_BADHANDLE
NFS4ERR_BADXDR
NFS4ERR_DELAY
NFS4ERR_FHEXPIRED
NFS4ERR_INVAL
NFS4ERR_MOVED
NFS4ERR_NOFILEHANDLE
NFS4ERR_NOTSUPP
NFS4ERR_NOT_SAME
NFS4ERR_RESOURCE
NFS4ERR_SERVERFAULT
NFS4ERR_STALE
NFS4ERR_WRONGSEC
Expires: December 2002 [Page 193]
Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol July 2002
14.2.36. Operation 38: WRITE - Write to File
SYNOPSIS
(cfh), stateid, offset, stable, data -> count, committed, writeverf
ARGUMENT
enum stable_how4 {
UNSTABLE4 = 0,
DATA_SYNC4 = 1,
FILE_SYNC4 = 2
};
struct WRITE4args {
/* CURRENT_FH: file */
stateid4 stateid;
offset4 offset;
stable_how4 stable;
opaque data<>;
};
RESULT
struct WRITE4resok {
count4 count;
stable_how4 committed;
verifier4 writeverf;
};
union WRITE4res switch (nfsstat4 status) {
case NFS4_OK:
WRITE4resok resok4;
default:
void;
};
DESCRIPTION
The WRITE operation is used to write data to a regular file. The
target file is specified by the current filehandle. The offset
specifies the offset where the data should be written. An offset
of 0 (zero) specifies that the write should start at the beginning
of the file. The count, as encoded as part of the opaque data
parameter, represents the number of bytes of data that are to be
written. If the count is 0 (zero), the WRITE will succeed and
return a count of 0 (zero) subject to permissions checking. The
server may choose to write fewer bytes than requested by the
client.
Expires: December 2002 [Page 194]
Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol July 2002
Part of the write request is a specification of how the write is to
be performed. The client specifies with the stable parameter the
method of how the data is to be processed by the server. If stable
is FILE_SYNC4, the server must commit the data written plus all
file system metadata to stable storage before returning results.
This corresponds to the NFS version 2 protocol semantics. Any
other behavior constitutes a protocol violation. If stable is
DATA_SYNC4, then the server must commit all of the data to stable
storage and enough of the metadata to retrieve the data before
returning. The server implementor is free to implement DATA_SYNC4
in the same fashion as FILE_SYNC4, but with a possible performance
drop. If stable is UNSTABLE4, the server is free to commit any
part of the data and the metadata to stable storage, including all
or none, before returning a reply to the client. There is no
guarantee whether or when any uncommitted data will subsequently be
committed to stable storage. The only guarantees made by the server
are that it will not destroy any data without changing the value of
verf and that it will not commit the data and metadata at a level
less than that requested by the client.
The stateid returned from a previous record lock or share
reservation request is provided as part of the argument. The
stateid is used by the server to verify that the associated lock is
still valid and to update lease timeouts for the client.
Upon successful completion, the following results are returned.
The count result is the number of bytes of data written to the
file. The server may write fewer bytes than requested. If so, the
actual number of bytes written starting at location, offset, is
returned.
The server also returns an indication of the level of commitment of
the data and metadata via committed. If the server committed all
data and metadata to stable storage, committed should be set to
FILE_SYNC4. If the level of commitment was at least as strong as
DATA_SYNC4, then committed should be set to DATA_SYNC4. Otherwise,
committed must be returned as UNSTABLE4. If stable was FILE4_SYNC,
then committed must also be FILE_SYNC4: anything else constitutes a
protocol violation. If stable was DATA_SYNC4, then committed may be
FILE_SYNC4 or DATA_SYNC4: anything else constitutes a protocol
violation. If stable was UNSTABLE4, then committed may be either
FILE_SYNC4, DATA_SYNC4, or UNSTABLE4.
The final portion of the result is the write verifier. The write
verifier is a cookie that the client can use to determine whether
the server has changed instance (boot) state between a call to
WRITE and a subsequent call to either WRITE or COMMIT. This cookie
must be consistent during a single instance of the NFS version 4
protocol service and must be unique between instances of the NFS
version 4 protocol server, where uncommitted data may be lost.
If a client writes data to the server with the stable argument set
Expires: December 2002 [Page 195]
Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol July 2002
to UNSTABLE4 and the reply yields a committed response of
DATA_SYNC4 or UNSTABLE4, the client will follow up some time in the
future with a COMMIT operation to synchronize outstanding
asynchronous data and metadata with the server's stable storage,
barring client error. It is possible that due to client crash or
other error that a subsequent COMMIT will not be received by the
server.
On success, the current filehandle retains its value.
IMPLEMENTATION
It is possible for the server to write fewer bytes of data than
requested by the client. In this case, the server should not
return an error unless no data was written at all. If the server
writes less than the number of bytes specified, the client should
issue another WRITE to write the remaining data.
It is assumed that the act of writing data to a file will cause the
time_modified of the file to be updated. However, the
time_modified of the file should not be changed unless the contents
of the file are changed. Thus, a WRITE request with count set to 0
should not cause the time_modified of the file to be updated.
The definition of stable storage has been historically a point of
contention. The following expected properties of stable storage
may help in resolving design issues in the implementation. Stable
storage is persistent storage that survives:
1. Repeated power failures.
2. Hardware failures (of any board, power supply, etc.).
3. Repeated software crashes, including reboot cycle.
This definition does not address failure of the stable storage
module itself.
The verifier is defined to allow a client to detect different
instances of an NFS version 4 protocol server over which cached,
uncommitted data may be lost. In the most likely case, the verifier
allows the client to detect server reboots. This information is
required so that the client can safely determine whether the server
could have lost cached data. If the server fails unexpectedly and
the client has uncommitted data from previous WRITE requests (done
with the stable argument set to UNSTABLE4 and in which the result
committed was returned as UNSTABLE4 as well) it may not have
flushed cached data to stable storage. The burden of recovery is on
the client and the client will need to retransmit the data to the
server.
Expires: December 2002 [Page 196]
Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol July 2002
A suggested verifier would be to use the time that the server was
booted or the time the server was last started (if restarting the
server without a reboot results in lost buffers).
The committed field in the results allows the client to do more
effective caching. If the server is committing all WRITE requests
to stable storage, then it should return with committed set to
FILE_SYNC4, regardless of the value of the stable field in the
arguments. A server that uses an NVRAM accelerator may choose to
implement this policy. The client can use this to increase the
effectiveness of the cache by discarding cached data that has
already been committed on the server.
Some implementations may return NFS4ERR_NOSPC instead of
NFS4ERR_DQUOT when a user's quota is exceeded. In the case that
the current filehandle is a directory, the server will return
NFS4ERR_ISDIR. If the current filehandle is not a regular file or
a directory, the server will return NFS4ERR_INVAL.
ERRORS
NFS4ERR_ACCESS
NFS4ERR_BADHANDLE
NFS4ERR_BAD_STATEID
NFS4ERR_BADXDR
NFS4ERR_DELAY
NFS4ERR_DQUOT
NFS4ERR_EXPIRED
NFS4ERR_FBIG
NFS4ERR_FHEXPIRED
NFS4ERR_GRACE
NFS4ERR_INVAL
NFS4ERR_IO
NFS4ERR_ISDIR
NFS4ERR_LEASE_MOVED
NFS4ERR_LOCKED
NFS4ERR_MOVED
NFS4ERR_NOFILEHANDLE
NFS4ERR_NOSPC
NFS4ERR_NXIO
NFS4ERR_OLD_STATEID
NFS4ERR_OPENMODE
NFS4ERR_RESOURCE
NFS4ERR_ROFS
NFS4ERR_SERVERFAULT
NFS4ERR_STALE
NFS4ERR_STALE_STATEID
NFS4ERR_WRONGSEC
Expires: December 2002 [Page 197]
Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol July 2002
14.2.37. Operation 39: RELEASE_LOCKOWNER - Release Lockowner State
SYNOPSIS
lockowner -> ()
ARGUMENT
struct RELEASE_LOCKOWNER4args {
lock_owner4 lock_owner;
};
RESULT
struct RELEASE_LOCKOWNER4res {
nfsstat4 status;
};
DESCRIPTION
This operation is used to notify the server that the lock_owner is
no longer in use by the client. This allows the server to release
cached state related to the specified lock_owner.
IMPLEMENTATION
The client may choose to use this operation to ease the amount of
server state that is cached.
ERRORS
NFS4ERR_BADXDR
NFS4ERR_EXPIRED
NFS4ERR_GRACE
NFS4ERR_LEASE_MOVED
NFS4ERR_RESOURCE
NFS4ERR_SERVERFAULT
NFS4ERR_STALE_CLIENTID
Expires: December 2002 [Page 198]
Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol July 2002
15. NFS Version 4 Callback Procedures
The procedures used for callbacks are defined in the following
sections. In the interest of clarity, the terms "client" and
"server" refer to NFS clients and servers, despite the fact that for
an individual callback RPC, the sense of these terms would be
precisely the opposite.
15.1. Procedure 0: CB_NULL - No Operation
SYNOPSIS
<null>
ARGUMENT
void;
RESULT
void;
DESCRIPTION
Standard NULL procedure. Void argument, void response. Even
though there is no direct functionality associated with this
procedure, the server will use CB_NULL to confirm the existence of
a path for RPCs from server to client.
ERRORS
None.
Expires: December 2002 [Page 199]
Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol July 2002
15.2. Procedure 1: CB_COMPOUND - Compound Operations
SYNOPSIS
compoundargs -> compoundres
ARGUMENT
enum nfs_cb_opnum4 {
OP_CB_GETATTR = 3,
OP_CB_RECALL = 4
};
union nfs_cb_argop4 switch (unsigned argop) {
case OP_CB_GETATTR: CB_GETATTR4args opcbgetattr;
case OP_CB_RECALL: CB_RECALL4args opcbrecall;
};
struct CB_COMPOUND4args {
utf8string tag;
uint32_t minorversion;
uint32_t callback_ident;
nfs_cb_argop4 argarray<>;
};
RESULT
union nfs_cb_resop4 switch (unsigned resop){
case OP_CB_GETATTR: CB_GETATTR4res opcbgetattr;
case OP_CB_RECALL: CB_RECALL4res opcbrecall;
};
struct CB_COMPOUND4res {
nfsstat4 status;
utf8string tag;
nfs_cb_resop4 resarray<>;
};
DESCRIPTION
The CB_COMPOUND procedure is used to combine one or more of the
callback procedures into a single RPC request. The main callback
RPC program has two main procedures: CB_NULL and CB_COMPOUND. All
other operations use the CB_COMPOUND procedure as a wrapper.
In the processing of the CB_COMPOUND procedure, the client may find
that it does not have the available resources to execute any or all
of the operations within the CB_COMPOUND sequence. In this case,
the error NFS4ERR_RESOURCE will be returned for the particular
Expires: December 2002 [Page 200]
Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol July 2002
operation within the CB_COMPOUND procedure where the resource
exhaustion occurred. This assumes that all previous operations
within the CB_COMPOUND sequence have been evaluated successfully.
Contained within the CB_COMPOUND results is a 'status' field. This
status must be equivalent to the status of the last operation that
was executed within the CB_COMPOUND procedure. Therefore, if an
operation incurred an error then the 'status' value will be the
same error value as is being returned for the operation that
failed.
The definition of the "tag" in the request is left to the
implementor. It may be used to summarize the content of the
callback compound request for the benefit of packet sniffers and
engineers debugging implementations. However, the value of "tag"
in the response MUST be the same value as provided in the request.
The value of callback_ident is supplied by the client during
SETCLIENTID. The server must use the client supplied
callback_ident during the CB_COMPOUND to allow the client to
properly identify the server.
IMPLEMENTATION
The CB_COMPOUND procedure is used to combine individual operations
into a single RPC request. The client interprets each of the
operations in turn. If an operation is executed by the client and
the status of that operation is NFS4_OK, then the next operation in
the CB_COMPOUND procedure is executed. The client continues this
process until there are no more operations to be executed or one of
the operations has a status value other than NFS4_OK.
ERRORS
NFS4ERR_BADHANDLE
NFS4ERR_BAD_STATEID
NFS4ERR_RESOURCE
Expires: December 2002 [Page 201]
Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol July 2002
15.2.1. Operation 3: CB_GETATTR - Get Attributes
SYNOPSIS
fh, attrbits -> attrbits, attrvals
ARGUMENT
struct CB_GETATTR4args {
nfs_fh4 fh;
bitmap4 attr_request;
};
RESULT
struct CB_GETATTR4resok {
fattr4 obj_attributes;
};
union CB_GETATTR4res switch (nfsstat4 status) {
case NFS4_OK:
CB_GETATTR4resok resok4;
default:
void;
};
DESCRIPTION
The CB_GETATTR operation is used to obtain the attributes modified
by an open delegate to allow the server to respond to GETATTR
requests for a file which is the subject of an open delegation.
If the handle specified is not one for which the client holds a
write open delegation, an NFS4ERR_BADHANDLE error is returned.
IMPLEMENTATION
The client returns attrbits and the associated attribute values
only for attributes that it may change (change, time_modify, size).
ERRORS
NFS4ERR_BADHANDLE
NFS4ERR_BADXDR
NFS4ERR_RESOURCE
NFS4ERR_SERVERFAULT
Expires: December 2002 [Page 202]
Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol July 2002
15.2.2. Operation 4: CB_RECALL - Recall an Open Delegation
SYNOPSIS
stateid, truncate, fh -> status
ARGUMENT
struct CB_RECALL4args {
stateid4 stateid;
bool truncate;
nfs_fh4 fh;
};
RESULT
struct CB_RECALL4res {
nfsstat4 status;
};
DESCRIPTION
The CB_RECALL operation is used to begin the process of recalling
an open delegation and returning it to the server.
The truncate flag is used to optimize recall for a file which is
about to be truncated to zero. When it is set, the client is freed
of obligation to propagate modified data for the file to the
server, since this data is irrelevant.
If the handle specified is not one for which the client holds an
open delegation, an NFS4ERR_BADHANDLE error is returned.
If the stateid specified is not one corresponding to an open
delegation for the file specified by the filehandle, an
NFS4ERR_BAD_STATEID is returned.
IMPLEMENTATION
The client should reply to the callback immediately. Replying does
not complete the recall. The recall is not complete until the
delegation is returned using a DELEGRETURN.
ERRORS
NFS4ERR_BADHANDLE
NFS4ERR_BAD_STATEID
Expires: December 2002 [Page 203]
Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol July 2002
NFS4ERR_BADXDR
NFS4ERR_RESOURCE
NFS4ERR_SERVERFAULT
Expires: December 2002 [Page 204]
Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol July 2002
16. Security Considerations
The major security feature to consider is the authentication of the
user making the request of NFS service. Consideration should also be
given to the integrity and privacy of this NFS request. These
specific issues are discussed as part of the section on "RPC and
Security Flavor".
Expires: December 2002 [Page 205]
Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol July 2002
17. IANA Considerations
17.1. Named Attribute Definition
The NFS version 4 protocol provides for the association of named
attributes to files. The name space identifiers for these attributes
are defined as string names. The protocol does not define the
specific assignment of the name space for these file attributes; the
application developer or system vendor is allowed to define the
attribute, its semantics, and the associated name. Even though this
name space will not be specifically controlled to prevent collisions,
the application developer or system vendor is strongly encouraged to
provide the name assignment and associated semantics for attributes
via an Informational RFC. This will provide for interoperability
where common interests exist.
Expires: December 2002 [Page 206]
Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol July 2002
18. RPC definition file
/*
* Copyright (C) The Internet Society (1998,1999,2000,2001,2002).
* All Rights Reserved.
*/
/*
* nfs4_prot.x
*
*/
%#pragma ident "@(#)nfs4_prot.x 1.109"
/*
* Basic typedefs for RFC 1832 data type definitions
*/
typedef int int32_t;
typedef unsigned int uint32_t;
typedef hyper int64_t;
typedef unsigned hyper uint64_t;
/*
* Sizes
*/
const NFS4_FHSIZE = 128;
const NFS4_VERIFIER_SIZE = 8;
const NFS4_OPAQUE_LIMIT = 1024;
/*
* File types
*/
enum nfs_ftype4 {
NF4REG = 1, /* Regular File */
NF4DIR = 2, /* Directory */
NF4BLK = 3, /* Special File - block device */
NF4CHR = 4, /* Special File - character device */
NF4LNK = 5, /* Symbolic Link */
NF4SOCK = 6, /* Special File - socket */
NF4FIFO = 7, /* Special File - fifo */
NF4ATTRDIR = 8, /* Attribute Directory */
NF4NAMEDATTR = 9 /* Named Attribute */
};
/*
* Error status
*/
enum nfsstat4 {
NFS4_OK = 0,
NFS4ERR_PERM = 1,
NFS4ERR_NOENT = 2,
NFS4ERR_IO = 5,
Expires: December 2002 [Page 207]
Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol July 2002
NFS4ERR_NXIO = 6,
NFS4ERR_ACCESS = 13,
NFS4ERR_EXIST = 17,
NFS4ERR_XDEV = 18,
NFS4ERR_NODEV = 19,
NFS4ERR_NOTDIR = 20,
NFS4ERR_ISDIR = 21,
NFS4ERR_INVAL = 22,
NFS4ERR_FBIG = 27,
NFS4ERR_NOSPC = 28,
NFS4ERR_ROFS = 30,
NFS4ERR_MLINK = 31,
NFS4ERR_NAMETOOLONG = 63,
NFS4ERR_NOTEMPTY = 66,
NFS4ERR_DQUOT = 69,
NFS4ERR_STALE = 70,
NFS4ERR_BADHANDLE = 10001,
NFS4ERR_BAD_COOKIE = 10003,
NFS4ERR_NOTSUPP = 10004,
NFS4ERR_TOOSMALL = 10005,
NFS4ERR_SERVERFAULT = 10006,
NFS4ERR_BADTYPE = 10007,
NFS4ERR_DELAY = 10008,
NFS4ERR_SAME = 10009,/* nverify says attrs same */
NFS4ERR_DENIED = 10010,/* lock unavailable */
NFS4ERR_EXPIRED = 10011,/* lock lease expired */
NFS4ERR_LOCKED = 10012,/* I/O failed due to lock */
NFS4ERR_GRACE = 10013,/* in grace period */
NFS4ERR_FHEXPIRED = 10014,/* file handle expired */
NFS4ERR_SHARE_DENIED = 10015,/* share reserve denied */
NFS4ERR_WRONGSEC = 10016,/* wrong security flavor */
NFS4ERR_CLID_INUSE = 10017,/* clientid in use */
NFS4ERR_RESOURCE = 10018,/* resource exhaustion */
NFS4ERR_MOVED = 10019,/* filesystem relocated */
NFS4ERR_NOFILEHANDLE = 10020,/* current FH is not set */
NFS4ERR_MINOR_VERS_MISMATCH = 10021,/* minor vers not supp */
NFS4ERR_STALE_CLIENTID = 10022,
NFS4ERR_STALE_STATEID = 10023,
NFS4ERR_OLD_STATEID = 10024,
NFS4ERR_BAD_STATEID = 10025,
NFS4ERR_BAD_SEQID = 10026,
NFS4ERR_NOT_SAME = 10027,/* verify - attrs not same */
NFS4ERR_LOCK_RANGE = 10028,
NFS4ERR_SYMLINK = 10029,
NFS4ERR_READDIR_NOSPC = 10030,
NFS4ERR_LEASE_MOVED = 10031,
NFS4ERR_ATTRNOTSUPP = 10032,
NFS4ERR_NO_GRACE = 10033,
NFS4ERR_RECLAIM_BAD = 10034,
NFS4ERR_RECLAIM_CONFLICT = 10035,
NFS4ERR_BADXDR = 10036,
NFS4ERR_LOCKS_HELD = 10037,
Expires: December 2002 [Page 208]
Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol July 2002
NFS4ERR_OPENMODE = 10038,
NFS4ERR_BADOWNER = 10039
};
/*
* Basic data types
*/
typedef uint32_t bitmap4<>;
typedef uint64_t offset4;
typedef uint32_t count4;
typedef uint64_t length4;
typedef uint64_t clientid4;
typedef uint32_t seqid4;
typedef opaque utf8string<>;
typedef utf8string component4;
typedef component4 pathname4<>;
typedef uint64_t nfs_lockid4;
typedef uint64_t nfs_cookie4;
typedef utf8string linktext4;
typedef opaque sec_oid4<>;
typedef uint32_t qop4;
typedef uint32_t mode4;
typedef uint64_t changeid4;
typedef opaque verifier4[NFS4_VERIFIER_SIZE];
/*
* Timeval
*/
struct nfstime4 {
int64_t seconds;
uint32_t nseconds;
};
enum time_how4 {
SET_TO_SERVER_TIME4 = 0,
SET_TO_CLIENT_TIME4 = 1
};
union settime4 switch (time_how4 set_it) {
case SET_TO_CLIENT_TIME4:
nfstime4 time;
default:
void;
};
/*
* File access handle
*/
typedef opaque nfs_fh4<NFS4_FHSIZE>;
/*
Expires: December 2002 [Page 209]
Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol July 2002
* File attribute definitions
*/
/*
* FSID structure for major/minor
*/
struct fsid4 {
uint64_t major;
uint64_t minor;
};
/*
* Filesystem locations attribute for relocation/migration
*/
struct fs_location4 {
utf8string server<>;
pathname4 rootpath;
};
struct fs_locations4 {
pathname4 fs_root;
fs_location4 locations<>;
};
/*
* Various Access Control Entry definitions
*/
/*
* Mask that indicates which Access Control Entries are supported.
* Values for the fattr4_aclsupport attribute.
*/
const ACL4_SUPPORT_ALLOW_ACL = 0x00000001;
const ACL4_SUPPORT_DENY_ACL = 0x00000002;
const ACL4_SUPPORT_AUDIT_ACL = 0x00000004;
const ACL4_SUPPORT_ALARM_ACL = 0x00000008;
typedef uint32_t acetype4;
/*
* acetype4 values, others can be added as needed.
*/
const ACE4_ACCESS_ALLOWED_ACE_TYPE = 0x00000000;
const ACE4_ACCESS_DENIED_ACE_TYPE = 0x00000001;
const ACE4_SYSTEM_AUDIT_ACE_TYPE = 0x00000002;
const ACE4_SYSTEM_ALARM_ACE_TYPE = 0x00000003;
/*
* ACE flag
*/
Expires: December 2002 [Page 210]
Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol July 2002
typedef uint32_t aceflag4;
/*
* ACE flag values
*/
const ACE4_FILE_INHERIT_ACE = 0x00000001;
const ACE4_DIRECTORY_INHERIT_ACE = 0x00000002;
const ACE4_NO_PROPAGATE_INHERIT_ACE = 0x00000004;
const ACE4_INHERIT_ONLY_ACE = 0x00000008;
const ACE4_SUCCESSFUL_ACCESS_ACE_FLAG = 0x00000010;
const ACE4_FAILED_ACCESS_ACE_FLAG = 0x00000020;
const ACE4_IDENTIFIER_GROUP = 0x00000040;
/*
* ACE mask
*/
typedef uint32_t acemask4;
/*
* ACE mask values
*/
const ACE4_READ_DATA = 0x00000001;
const ACE4_LIST_DIRECTORY = 0x00000001;
const ACE4_WRITE_DATA = 0x00000002;
const ACE4_ADD_FILE = 0x00000002;
const ACE4_APPEND_DATA = 0x00000004;
const ACE4_ADD_SUBDIRECTORY = 0x00000004;
const ACE4_READ_NAMED_ATTRS = 0x00000008;
const ACE4_WRITE_NAMED_ATTRS = 0x00000010;
const ACE4_EXECUTE = 0x00000020;
const ACE4_DELETE_CHILD = 0x00000040;
const ACE4_READ_ATTRIBUTES = 0x00000080;
const ACE4_WRITE_ATTRIBUTES = 0x00000100;
const ACE4_DELETE = 0x00010000;
const ACE4_READ_ACL = 0x00020000;
const ACE4_WRITE_ACL = 0x00040000;
const ACE4_WRITE_OWNER = 0x00080000;
const ACE4_SYNCHRONIZE = 0x00100000;
/*
* ACE4_GENERIC_READ -- defined as combination of
* ACE4_READ_ACL |
* ACE4_READ_DATA |
* ACE4_READ_ATTRIBUTES |
* ACE4_SYNCHRONIZE
*/
const ACE4_GENERIC_READ = 0x00120081;
/*
Expires: December 2002 [Page 211]
Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol July 2002
* ACE4_GENERIC_WRITE -- defined as combination of
* ACE4_READ_ACL |
* ACE4_WRITE_DATA |
* ACE4_WRITE_ATTRIBUTES |
* ACE4_WRITE_ACL |
* ACE4_APPEND_DATA |
* ACE4_SYNCHRONIZE
*/
const ACE4_GENERIC_WRITE = 0x00160106;
/*
* ACE4_GENERIC_EXECUTE -- defined as combination of
* ACE4_READ_ACL
* ACE4_READ_ATTRIBUTES
* ACE4_EXECUTE
* ACE4_SYNCHRONIZE
*/
const ACE4_GENERIC_EXECUTE = 0x001200A0;
/*
* Access Control Entry definition
*/
struct nfsace4 {
acetype4 type;
aceflag4 flag;
acemask4 access_mask;
utf8string who;
};
/*
* Special data/attribute associated with
* file types NF4BLK and NF4CHR.
*/
struct specdata4 {
uint32_t specdata1;
uint32_t specdata2;
};
/*
* Values for fattr4_fh_expire_type
*/
const FH4_PERSISTENT = 0x00000000;
const FH4_NOEXPIRE_WITH_OPEN = 0x00000001;
const FH4_VOLATILE_ANY = 0x00000002;
const FH4_VOL_MIGRATION = 0x00000004;
const FH4_VOL_RENAME = 0x00000008;
typedef bitmap4 fattr4_supported_attrs;
typedef nfs_ftype4 fattr4_type;
Expires: December 2002 [Page 212]
Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol July 2002
typedef uint32_t fattr4_fh_expire_type;
typedef changeid4 fattr4_change;
typedef uint64_t fattr4_size;
typedef bool fattr4_link_support;
typedef bool fattr4_symlink_support;
typedef bool fattr4_named_attr;
typedef fsid4 fattr4_fsid;
typedef bool fattr4_unique_handles;
typedef uint32_t fattr4_lease_time;
typedef nfsstat4 fattr4_rdattr_error;
typedef nfsace4 fattr4_acl<>;
typedef uint32_t fattr4_aclsupport;
typedef bool fattr4_archive;
typedef bool fattr4_cansettime;
typedef bool fattr4_case_insensitive;
typedef bool fattr4_case_preserving;
typedef bool fattr4_chown_restricted;
typedef uint64_t fattr4_fileid;
typedef uint64_t fattr4_files_avail;
typedef nfs_fh4 fattr4_filehandle;
typedef uint64_t fattr4_files_free;
typedef uint64_t fattr4_files_total;
typedef fs_locations4 fattr4_fs_locations;
typedef bool fattr4_hidden;
typedef bool fattr4_homogeneous;
typedef uint64_t fattr4_maxfilesize;
typedef uint32_t fattr4_maxlink;
typedef uint32_t fattr4_maxname;
typedef uint64_t fattr4_maxread;
typedef uint64_t fattr4_maxwrite;
typedef utf8string fattr4_mimetype;
typedef mode4 fattr4_mode;
typedef bool fattr4_no_trunc;
typedef uint32_t fattr4_numlinks;
typedef utf8string fattr4_owner;
typedef utf8string fattr4_owner_group;
typedef uint64_t fattr4_quota_avail_hard;
typedef uint64_t fattr4_quota_avail_soft;
typedef uint64_t fattr4_quota_used;
typedef specdata4 fattr4_rawdev;
typedef uint64_t fattr4_space_avail;
typedef uint64_t fattr4_space_free;
typedef uint64_t fattr4_space_total;
typedef uint64_t fattr4_space_used;
typedef bool fattr4_system;
typedef nfstime4 fattr4_time_access;
typedef settime4 fattr4_time_access_set;
typedef nfstime4 fattr4_time_backup;
typedef nfstime4 fattr4_time_create;
typedef nfstime4 fattr4_time_delta;
typedef nfstime4 fattr4_time_metadata;
Expires: December 2002 [Page 213]
Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol July 2002
typedef nfstime4 fattr4_time_modify;
typedef settime4 fattr4_time_modify_set;
/*
* Mandatory Attributes
*/
const FATTR4_SUPPORTED_ATTRS = 0;
const FATTR4_TYPE = 1;
const FATTR4_FH_EXPIRE_TYPE = 2;
const FATTR4_CHANGE = 3;
const FATTR4_SIZE = 4;
const FATTR4_LINK_SUPPORT = 5;
const FATTR4_SYMLINK_SUPPORT = 6;
const FATTR4_NAMED_ATTR = 7;
const FATTR4_FSID = 8;
const FATTR4_UNIQUE_HANDLES = 9;
const FATTR4_LEASE_TIME = 10;
const FATTR4_RDATTR_ERROR = 11;
/*
* Recommended Attributes
*/
const FATTR4_ACL = 12;
const FATTR4_ACLSUPPORT = 13;
const FATTR4_ARCHIVE = 14;
const FATTR4_CANSETTIME = 15;
const FATTR4_CASE_INSENSITIVE = 16;
const FATTR4_CASE_PRESERVING = 17;
const FATTR4_CHOWN_RESTRICTED = 18;
const FATTR4_FILEHANDLE = 19;
const FATTR4_FILEID = 20;
const FATTR4_FILES_AVAIL = 21;
const FATTR4_FILES_FREE = 22;
const FATTR4_FILES_TOTAL = 23;
const FATTR4_FS_LOCATIONS = 24;
const FATTR4_HIDDEN = 25;
const FATTR4_HOMOGENEOUS = 26;
const FATTR4_MAXFILESIZE = 27;
const FATTR4_MAXLINK = 28;
const FATTR4_MAXNAME = 29;
const FATTR4_MAXREAD = 30;
const FATTR4_MAXWRITE = 31;
const FATTR4_MIMETYPE = 32;
const FATTR4_MODE = 33;
const FATTR4_NO_TRUNC = 34;
const FATTR4_NUMLINKS = 35;
const FATTR4_OWNER = 36;
const FATTR4_OWNER_GROUP = 37;
const FATTR4_QUOTA_AVAIL_HARD = 38;
const FATTR4_QUOTA_AVAIL_SOFT = 39;
const FATTR4_QUOTA_USED = 40;
Expires: December 2002 [Page 214]
Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol July 2002
const FATTR4_RAWDEV = 41;
const FATTR4_SPACE_AVAIL = 42;
const FATTR4_SPACE_FREE = 43;
const FATTR4_SPACE_TOTAL = 44;
const FATTR4_SPACE_USED = 45;
const FATTR4_SYSTEM = 46;
const FATTR4_TIME_ACCESS = 47;
const FATTR4_TIME_ACCESS_SET = 48;
const FATTR4_TIME_BACKUP = 49;
const FATTR4_TIME_CREATE = 50;
const FATTR4_TIME_DELTA = 51;
const FATTR4_TIME_METADATA = 52;
const FATTR4_TIME_MODIFY = 53;
const FATTR4_TIME_MODIFY_SET = 54;
typedef opaque attrlist4<>;
/*
* File attribute container
*/
struct fattr4 {
bitmap4 attrmask;
attrlist4 attr_vals;
};
/*
* Change info for the client
*/
struct change_info4 {
bool atomic;
changeid4 before;
changeid4 after;
};
struct clientaddr4 {
/* see struct rpcb in RFC 1833 */
string r_netid<>; /* network id */
string r_addr<>; /* universal address */
};
/*
* Callback program info as provided by the client
*/
struct cb_client4 {
uint32_t cb_program;
clientaddr4 cb_location;
};
/*
* Stateid
*/
Expires: December 2002 [Page 215]
Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol July 2002
struct stateid4 {
uint32_t seqid;
opaque other[12];
};
/*
* Client ID
*/
struct nfs_client_id4 {
verifier4 verifier;
opaque id<NFS4_OPAQUE_LIMIT>;
};
struct open_owner4 {
clientid4 clientid;
opaque owner<NFS4_OPAQUE_LIMIT>;
};
struct lock_owner4 {
clientid4 clientid;
opaque owner<NFS4_OPAQUE_LIMIT>;
};
enum nfs_lock_type4 {
READ_LT = 1,
WRITE_LT = 2,
READW_LT = 3, /* blocking read */
WRITEW_LT = 4 /* blocking write */
};
/*
* ACCESS: Check access permission
*/
const ACCESS4_READ = 0x00000001;
const ACCESS4_LOOKUP = 0x00000002;
const ACCESS4_MODIFY = 0x00000004;
const ACCESS4_EXTEND = 0x00000008;
const ACCESS4_DELETE = 0x00000010;
const ACCESS4_EXECUTE = 0x00000020;
struct ACCESS4args {
/* CURRENT_FH: object */
uint32_t access;
};
struct ACCESS4resok {
uint32_t supported;
uint32_t access;
};
union ACCESS4res switch (nfsstat4 status) {
case NFS4_OK:
Expires: December 2002 [Page 216]
Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol July 2002
ACCESS4resok resok4;
default:
void;
};
/*
* CLOSE: Close a file and release share locks
*/
struct CLOSE4args {
/* CURRENT_FH: object */
seqid4 seqid;
stateid4 open_stateid;
};
union CLOSE4res switch (nfsstat4 status) {
case NFS4_OK:
stateid4 open_stateid;
default:
void;
};
/*
* COMMIT: Commit cached data on server to stable storage
*/
struct COMMIT4args {
/* CURRENT_FH: file */
offset4 offset;
count4 count;
};
struct COMMIT4resok {
verifier4 writeverf;
};
union COMMIT4res switch (nfsstat4 status) {
case NFS4_OK:
COMMIT4resok resok4;
default:
void;
};
/*
* CREATE: Create a non-regular file
*/
union createtype4 switch (nfs_ftype4 type) {
case NF4LNK:
linktext4 linkdata;
case NF4BLK:
case NF4CHR:
specdata4 devdata;
case NF4SOCK:
Expires: December 2002 [Page 217]
Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol July 2002
case NF4FIFO:
case NF4DIR:
void;
default:
void; /* server should return NFS4ERR_BADTYPE */
};
struct CREATE4args {
/* CURRENT_FH: directory for creation */
createtype4 objtype;
component4 objname;
fattr4 createattrs;
};
struct CREATE4resok {
change_info4 cinfo;
bitmap4 attrset; /* attributes set */
};
union CREATE4res switch (nfsstat4 status) {
case NFS4_OK:
CREATE4resok resok4;
default:
void;
};
/*
* DELEGPURGE: Purge Delegations Awaiting Recovery
*/
struct DELEGPURGE4args {
clientid4 clientid;
};
struct DELEGPURGE4res {
nfsstat4 status;
};
/*
* DELEGRETURN: Return a delegation
*/
struct DELEGRETURN4args {
/* CURRENT_FH: delegated file */
stateid4 deleg_stateid;
};
struct DELEGRETURN4res {
nfsstat4 status;
};
/*
* GETATTR: Get file attributes
*/
Expires: December 2002 [Page 218]
Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol July 2002
struct GETATTR4args {
/* CURRENT_FH: directory or file */
bitmap4 attr_request;
};
struct GETATTR4resok {
fattr4 obj_attributes;
};
union GETATTR4res switch (nfsstat4 status) {
case NFS4_OK:
GETATTR4resok resok4;
default:
void;
};
/*
* GETFH: Get current filehandle
*/
struct GETFH4resok {
nfs_fh4 object;
};
union GETFH4res switch (nfsstat4 status) {
case NFS4_OK:
GETFH4resok resok4;
default:
void;
};
/*
* LINK: Create link to an object
*/
struct LINK4args {
/* SAVED_FH: source object */
/* CURRENT_FH: target directory */
component4 newname;
};
struct LINK4resok {
change_info4 cinfo;
};
union LINK4res switch (nfsstat4 status) {
case NFS4_OK:
LINK4resok resok4;
default:
void;
};
/*
* For LOCK, transition from open_owner to new lock_owner
Expires: December 2002 [Page 219]
Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol July 2002
*/
struct open_to_lock_owner4 {
seqid4 open_seqid;
stateid4 open_stateid;
seqid4 lock_seqid;
lock_owner4 lock_owner;
};
/*
* For LOCK, existing lock_owner continues to request file locks
*/
struct exist_lock_owner4 {
stateid4 lock_stateid;
seqid4 lock_seqid;
};
union locker4 switch (bool new_lock_owner) {
case TRUE:
open_to_lock_owner4 open_owner;
case FALSE:
exist_lock_owner4 lock_owner;
};
/*
* LOCK/LOCKT/LOCKU: Record lock management
*/
struct LOCK4args {
/* CURRENT_FH: file */
nfs_lock_type4 locktype;
bool reclaim;
offset4 offset;
length4 length;
locker4 locker;
};
struct LOCK4denied {
offset4 offset;
length4 length;
nfs_lock_type4 locktype;
lock_owner4 owner;
};
struct LOCK4resok {
stateid4 lock_stateid;
};
union LOCK4res switch (nfsstat4 status) {
case NFS4_OK:
LOCK4resok resok4;
case NFS4ERR_DENIED:
LOCK4denied denied;
default:
Expires: December 2002 [Page 220]
Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol July 2002
void;
};
struct LOCKT4args {
/* CURRENT_FH: file */
nfs_lock_type4 locktype;
offset4 offset;
length4 length;
lock_owner4 owner;
};
union LOCKT4res switch (nfsstat4 status) {
case NFS4ERR_DENIED:
LOCK4denied denied;
case NFS4_OK:
void;
default:
void;
};
struct LOCKU4args {
/* CURRENT_FH: file */
nfs_lock_type4 locktype;
seqid4 seqid;
stateid4 lock_stateid;
offset4 offset;
length4 length;
};
union LOCKU4res switch (nfsstat4 status) {
case NFS4_OK:
stateid4 lock_stateid;
default:
void;
};
/*
* LOOKUP: Lookup filename
*/
struct LOOKUP4args {
/* CURRENT_FH: directory */
component4 objname;
};
struct LOOKUP4res {
/* CURRENT_FH: object */
nfsstat4 status;
};
/*
* LOOKUPP: Lookup parent directory
*/
Expires: December 2002 [Page 221]
Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol July 2002
struct LOOKUPP4res {
/* CURRENT_FH: directory */
nfsstat4 status;
};
/*
* NVERIFY: Verify attributes different
*/
struct NVERIFY4args {
/* CURRENT_FH: object */
fattr4 obj_attributes;
};
struct NVERIFY4res {
nfsstat4 status;
};
/*
* Various definitions for OPEN
*/
enum createmode4 {
UNCHECKED4 = 0,
GUARDED4 = 1,
EXCLUSIVE4 = 2
};
union createhow4 switch (createmode4 mode) {
case UNCHECKED4:
case GUARDED4:
fattr4 createattrs;
case EXCLUSIVE4:
verifier4 createverf;
};
enum opentype4 {
OPEN4_NOCREATE = 0,
OPEN4_CREATE = 1
};
union openflag4 switch (opentype4 opentype) {
case OPEN4_CREATE:
createhow4 how;
default:
void;
};
/* Next definitions used for OPEN delegation */
enum limit_by4 {
NFS_LIMIT_SIZE = 1,
NFS_LIMIT_BLOCKS = 2
/* others as needed */
};
Expires: December 2002 [Page 222]
Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol July 2002
struct nfs_modified_limit4 {
uint32_t num_blocks;
uint32_t bytes_per_block;
};
union nfs_space_limit4 switch (limit_by4 limitby) {
/* limit specified as file size */
case NFS_LIMIT_SIZE:
uint64_t filesize;
/* limit specified by number of blocks */
case NFS_LIMIT_BLOCKS:
nfs_modified_limit4 mod_blocks;
} ;
/*
* Share Access and Deny constants for open argument
*/
const OPEN4_SHARE_ACCESS_READ = 0x00000001;
const OPEN4_SHARE_ACCESS_WRITE = 0x00000002;
const OPEN4_SHARE_ACCESS_BOTH = 0x00000003;
const OPEN4_SHARE_DENY_NONE = 0x00000000;
const OPEN4_SHARE_DENY_READ = 0x00000001;
const OPEN4_SHARE_DENY_WRITE = 0x00000002;
const OPEN4_SHARE_DENY_BOTH = 0x00000003;
enum open_delegation_type4 {
OPEN_DELEGATE_NONE = 0,
OPEN_DELEGATE_READ = 1,
OPEN_DELEGATE_WRITE = 2
};
enum open_claim_type4 {
CLAIM_NULL = 0,
CLAIM_PREVIOUS = 1,
CLAIM_DELEGATE_CUR = 2,
CLAIM_DELEGATE_PREV = 3
};
struct open_claim_delegate_cur4 {
stateid4 delegate_stateid;
component4 file;
};
union open_claim4 switch (open_claim_type4 claim) {
/*
* No special rights to file. Ordinary OPEN of the specified file.
*/
case CLAIM_NULL:
/* CURRENT_FH: directory */
component4 file;
Expires: December 2002 [Page 223]
Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol July 2002
/*
* Right to the file established by an open previous to server
* reboot. File identified by filehandle obtained at that time
* rather than by name.
*/
case CLAIM_PREVIOUS:
/* CURRENT_FH: file being reclaimed */
open_delegation_type4 delegate_type;
/*
* Right to file based on a delegation granted by the server.
* File is specified by name.
*/
case CLAIM_DELEGATE_CUR:
/* CURRENT_FH: directory */
open_claim_delegate_cur4 delegate_cur_info;
/* Right to file based on a delegation granted to a previous boot
* instance of the client. File is specified by name.
*/
case CLAIM_DELEGATE_PREV:
/* CURRENT_FH: directory */
component4 file_delegate_prev;
};
/*
* OPEN: Open a file, potentially receiving an open delegation
*/
struct OPEN4args {
seqid4 seqid;
uint32_t share_access;
uint32_t share_deny;
open_owner4 owner;
openflag4 openhow;
open_claim4 claim;
};
struct open_read_delegation4 {
stateid4 stateid; /* Stateid for delegation*/
bool recall; /* Pre-recalled flag for
delegations obtained
by reclaim
(CLAIM_PREVIOUS) */
nfsace4 permissions; /* Defines users who don't
need an ACCESS call to
open for read */
};
struct open_write_delegation4 {
stateid4 stateid; /* Stateid for delegation */
bool recall; /* Pre-recalled flag for
delegations obtained
Expires: December 2002 [Page 224]
Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol July 2002
by reclaim
(CLAIM_PREVIOUS) */
nfs_space_limit4 space_limit; /* Defines condition that
the client must check to
determine whether the
file needs to be flushed
to the server on close.
*/
nfsace4 permissions; /* Defines users who don't
need an ACCESS call as
part of a delegated
open. */
};
union open_delegation4
switch (open_delegation_type4 delegation_type) {
case OPEN_DELEGATE_NONE:
void;
case OPEN_DELEGATE_READ:
open_read_delegation4 read;
case OPEN_DELEGATE_WRITE:
open_write_delegation4 write;
};
/*
* Result flags
*/
/* Mandatory locking is in effect for this file. */
const OPEN4_RESULT_MLOCK = 0x00000001;
/* Client must confirm open */
const OPEN4_RESULT_CONFIRM = 0x00000002;
/* Type of file locking behavior at the server */
const OPEN4_RESULT_LOCKTYPE_POSIX = 0x00000004;
struct OPEN4resok {
stateid4 stateid; /* Stateid for open */
change_info4 cinfo; /* Directory Change Info */
uint32_t rflags; /* Result flags */
bitmap4 attrset; /* attribute set for create*/
open_delegation4 delegation; /* Info on any open
delegation */
};
union OPEN4res switch (nfsstat4 status) {
case NFS4_OK:
/* CURRENT_FH: opened file */
OPEN4resok resok4;
default:
void;
};
/*
Expires: December 2002 [Page 225]
Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol July 2002
* OPENATTR: open named attributes directory
*/
struct OPENATTR4args {
/* CURRENT_FH: object */
bool createdir;
};
struct OPENATTR4res {
/* CURRENT_FH: named attr directory */
nfsstat4 status;
};
/*
* OPEN_CONFIRM: confirm the open
*/
struct OPEN_CONFIRM4args {
/* CURRENT_FH: opened file */
stateid4 open_stateid;
seqid4 seqid;
};
struct OPEN_CONFIRM4resok {
stateid4 open_stateid;
};
union OPEN_CONFIRM4res switch (nfsstat4 status) {
case NFS4_OK:
OPEN_CONFIRM4resok resok4;
default:
void;
};
/*
* OPEN_DOWNGRADE: downgrade the access/deny for a file
*/
struct OPEN_DOWNGRADE4args {
/* CURRENT_FH: opened file */
stateid4 open_stateid;
seqid4 seqid;
uint32_t share_access;
uint32_t share_deny;
};
struct OPEN_DOWNGRADE4resok {
stateid4 open_stateid;
};
union OPEN_DOWNGRADE4res switch(nfsstat4 status) {
case NFS4_OK:
OPEN_DOWNGRADE4resok resok4;
default:
void;
Expires: December 2002 [Page 226]
Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol July 2002
};
/*
* PUTFH: Set current filehandle
*/
struct PUTFH4args {
nfs_fh4 object;
};
struct PUTFH4res {
/* CURRENT_FH: */
nfsstat4 status;
};
/*
* PUTPUBFH: Set public filehandle
*/
struct PUTPUBFH4res {
/* CURRENT_FH: public fh */
nfsstat4 status;
};
/*
* PUTROOTFH: Set root filehandle
*/
struct PUTROOTFH4res {
/* CURRENT_FH: root fh */
nfsstat4 status;
};
/*
* READ: Read from file
*/
struct READ4args {
/* CURRENT_FH: file */
stateid4 stateid;
offset4 offset;
count4 count;
};
struct READ4resok {
bool eof;
opaque data<>;
};
union READ4res switch (nfsstat4 status) {
case NFS4_OK:
READ4resok resok4;
default:
void;
};
Expires: December 2002 [Page 227]
Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol July 2002
/*
* READDIR: Read directory
*/
struct READDIR4args {
/* CURRENT_FH: directory */
nfs_cookie4 cookie;
verifier4 cookieverf;
count4 dircount;
count4 maxcount;
bitmap4 attr_request;
};
struct entry4 {
nfs_cookie4 cookie;
component4 name;
fattr4 attrs;
entry4 *nextentry;
};
struct dirlist4 {
entry4 *entries;
bool eof;
};
struct READDIR4resok {
verifier4 cookieverf;
dirlist4 reply;
};
union READDIR4res switch (nfsstat4 status) {
case NFS4_OK:
READDIR4resok resok4;
default:
void;
};
/*
* READLINK: Read symbolic link
*/
struct READLINK4resok {
linktext4 link;
};
union READLINK4res switch (nfsstat4 status) {
case NFS4_OK:
READLINK4resok resok4;
default:
void;
};
Expires: December 2002 [Page 228]
Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol July 2002
/*
* REMOVE: Remove filesystem object
*/
struct REMOVE4args {
/* CURRENT_FH: directory */
component4 target;
};
struct REMOVE4resok {
change_info4 cinfo;
};
union REMOVE4res switch (nfsstat4 status) {
case NFS4_OK:
REMOVE4resok resok4;
default:
void;
};
/*
* RENAME: Rename directory entry
*/
struct RENAME4args {
/* SAVED_FH: source directory */
component4 oldname;
/* CURRENT_FH: target directory */
component4 newname;
};
struct RENAME4resok {
change_info4 source_cinfo;
change_info4 target_cinfo;
};
union RENAME4res switch (nfsstat4 status) {
case NFS4_OK:
RENAME4resok resok4;
default:
void;
};
/*
* RENEW: Renew a Lease
*/
struct RENEW4args {
clientid4 clientid;
};
struct RENEW4res {
nfsstat4 status;
};
Expires: December 2002 [Page 229]
Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol July 2002
/*
* RESTOREFH: Restore saved filehandle
*/
struct RESTOREFH4res {
/* CURRENT_FH: value of saved fh */
nfsstat4 status;
};
/*
* SAVEFH: Save current filehandle
*/
struct SAVEFH4res {
/* SAVED_FH: value of current fh */
nfsstat4 status;
};
/*
* SECINFO: Obtain Available Security Mechanisms
*/
struct SECINFO4args {
/* CURRENT_FH: directory */
component4 name;
};
/*
* From RFC 2203
*/
enum rpc_gss_svc_t {
RPC_GSS_SVC_NONE = 1,
RPC_GSS_SVC_INTEGRITY = 2,
RPC_GSS_SVC_PRIVACY = 3
};
struct rpcsec_gss_info {
sec_oid4 oid;
qop4 qop;
rpc_gss_svc_t service;
};
/* RPCSEC_GSS has a value of '6' - See RFC 2203 */
union secinfo4 switch (uint32_t flavor) {
case RPCSEC_GSS:
rpcsec_gss_info flavor_info;
default:
void;
};
typedef secinfo4 SECINFO4resok<>;
union SECINFO4res switch (nfsstat4 status) {
case NFS4_OK:
Expires: December 2002 [Page 230]
Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol July 2002
SECINFO4resok resok4;
default:
void;
};
/*
* SETATTR: Set attributes
*/
struct SETATTR4args {
/* CURRENT_FH: target object */
stateid4 stateid;
fattr4 obj_attributes;
};
struct SETATTR4res {
nfsstat4 status;
bitmap4 attrsset;
};
/*
* SETCLIENTID
*/
struct SETCLIENTID4args {
nfs_client_id4 client;
cb_client4 callback;
uint32_t callback_ident;
};
struct SETCLIENTID4resok {
clientid4 clientid;
};
union SETCLIENTID4res switch (nfsstat4 status) {
case NFS4_OK:
SETCLIENTID4resok resok4;
case NFS4ERR_CLID_INUSE:
clientaddr4 client_using;
default:
void;
};
struct SETCLIENTID_CONFIRM4args {
clientid4 clientid;
};
struct SETCLIENTID_CONFIRM4res {
nfsstat4 status;
};
/*
* VERIFY: Verify attributes same
*/
Expires: December 2002 [Page 231]
Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol July 2002
struct VERIFY4args {
/* CURRENT_FH: object */
fattr4 obj_attributes;
};
struct VERIFY4res {
nfsstat4 status;
};
/*
* WRITE: Write to file
*/
enum stable_how4 {
UNSTABLE4 = 0,
DATA_SYNC4 = 1,
FILE_SYNC4 = 2
};
struct WRITE4args {
/* CURRENT_FH: file */
stateid4 stateid;
offset4 offset;
stable_how4 stable;
opaque data<>;
};
struct WRITE4resok {
count4 count;
stable_how4 committed;
verifier4 writeverf;
};
union WRITE4res switch (nfsstat4 status) {
case NFS4_OK:
WRITE4resok resok4;
default:
void;
};
/*
* RELEASE_LOCKOWNER: Notify server to release lockowner
*/
struct RELEASE_LOCKOWNER4args {
lock_owner4 lock_owner;
};
struct RELEASE_LOCKOWNER4res {
nfsstat4 status;
};
/*
* Operation arrays
Expires: December 2002 [Page 232]
Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol July 2002
*/
enum nfs_opnum4 {
OP_ACCESS = 3,
OP_CLOSE = 4,
OP_COMMIT = 5,
OP_CREATE = 6,
OP_DELEGPURGE = 7,
OP_DELEGRETURN = 8,
OP_GETATTR = 9,
OP_GETFH = 10,
OP_LINK = 11,
OP_LOCK = 12,
OP_LOCKT = 13,
OP_LOCKU = 14,
OP_LOOKUP = 15,
OP_LOOKUPP = 16,
OP_NVERIFY = 17,
OP_OPEN = 18,
OP_OPENATTR = 19,
OP_OPEN_CONFIRM = 20,
OP_OPEN_DOWNGRADE = 21,
OP_PUTFH = 22,
OP_PUTPUBFH = 23,
OP_PUTROOTFH = 24,
OP_READ = 25,
OP_READDIR = 26,
OP_READLINK = 27,
OP_REMOVE = 28,
OP_RENAME = 29,
OP_RENEW = 30,
OP_RESTOREFH = 31,
OP_SAVEFH = 32,
OP_SECINFO = 33,
OP_SETATTR = 34,
OP_SETCLIENTID = 35,
OP_SETCLIENTID_CONFIRM = 36,
OP_VERIFY = 37,
OP_WRITE = 38,
OP_RELEASE_LOCKOWNER = 39
};
union nfs_argop4 switch (nfs_opnum4 argop) {
case OP_ACCESS: ACCESS4args opaccess;
case OP_CLOSE: CLOSE4args opclose;
case OP_COMMIT: COMMIT4args opcommit;
case OP_CREATE: CREATE4args opcreate;
case OP_DELEGPURGE: DELEGPURGE4args opdelegpurge;
case OP_DELEGRETURN: DELEGRETURN4args opdelegreturn;
case OP_GETATTR: GETATTR4args opgetattr;
case OP_GETFH: void;
case OP_LINK: LINK4args oplink;
Expires: December 2002 [Page 233]
Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol July 2002
case OP_LOCK: LOCK4args oplock;
case OP_LOCKT: LOCKT4args oplockt;
case OP_LOCKU: LOCKU4args oplocku;
case OP_LOOKUP: LOOKUP4args oplookup;
case OP_LOOKUPP: void;
case OP_NVERIFY: NVERIFY4args opnverify;
case OP_OPEN: OPEN4args opopen;
case OP_OPENATTR: OPENATTR4args opopenattr;
case OP_OPEN_CONFIRM: OPEN_CONFIRM4args opopen_confirm;
case OP_OPEN_DOWNGRADE: OPEN_DOWNGRADE4args opopen_downgrade;
case OP_PUTFH: PUTFH4args opputfh;
case OP_PUTPUBFH: void;
case OP_PUTROOTFH: void;
case OP_READ: READ4args opread;
case OP_READDIR: READDIR4args opreaddir;
case OP_READLINK: void;
case OP_REMOVE: REMOVE4args opremove;
case OP_RENAME: RENAME4args oprename;
case OP_RENEW: RENEW4args oprenew;
case OP_RESTOREFH: void;
case OP_SAVEFH: void;
case OP_SECINFO: SECINFO4args opsecinfo;
case OP_SETATTR: SETATTR4args opsetattr;
case OP_SETCLIENTID: SETCLIENTID4args opsetclientid;
case OP_SETCLIENTID_CONFIRM: SETCLIENTID_CONFIRM4args
opsetclientid_confirm;
case OP_VERIFY: VERIFY4args opverify;
case OP_WRITE: WRITE4args opwrite;
case OP_RELEASE_LOCKOWNER: RELEASE_LOCKOWNER4args
oprelease_lockowner;
};
union nfs_resop4 switch (nfs_opnum4 resop){
case OP_ACCESS: ACCESS4res opaccess;
case OP_CLOSE: CLOSE4res opclose;
case OP_COMMIT: COMMIT4res opcommit;
case OP_CREATE: CREATE4res opcreate;
case OP_DELEGPURGE: DELEGPURGE4res opdelegpurge;
case OP_DELEGRETURN: DELEGRETURN4res opdelegreturn;
case OP_GETATTR: GETATTR4res opgetattr;
case OP_GETFH: GETFH4res opgetfh;
case OP_LINK: LINK4res oplink;
case OP_LOCK: LOCK4res oplock;
case OP_LOCKT: LOCKT4res oplockt;
case OP_LOCKU: LOCKU4res oplocku;
case OP_LOOKUP: LOOKUP4res oplookup;
case OP_LOOKUPP: LOOKUPP4res oplookupp;
case OP_NVERIFY: NVERIFY4res opnverify;
case OP_OPEN: OPEN4res opopen;
case OP_OPENATTR: OPENATTR4res opopenattr;
case OP_OPEN_CONFIRM: OPEN_CONFIRM4res opopen_confirm;
case OP_OPEN_DOWNGRADE: OPEN_DOWNGRADE4res opopen_downgrade;
Expires: December 2002 [Page 234]
Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol July 2002
case OP_PUTFH: PUTFH4res opputfh;
case OP_PUTPUBFH: PUTPUBFH4res opputpubfh;
case OP_PUTROOTFH: PUTROOTFH4res opputrootfh;
case OP_READ: READ4res opread;
case OP_READDIR: READDIR4res opreaddir;
case OP_READLINK: READLINK4res opreadlink;
case OP_REMOVE: REMOVE4res opremove;
case OP_RENAME: RENAME4res oprename;
case OP_RENEW: RENEW4res oprenew;
case OP_RESTOREFH: RESTOREFH4res oprestorefh;
case OP_SAVEFH: SAVEFH4res opsavefh;
case OP_SECINFO: SECINFO4res opsecinfo;
case OP_SETATTR: SETATTR4res opsetattr;
case OP_SETCLIENTID: SETCLIENTID4res opsetclientid;
case OP_SETCLIENTID_CONFIRM: SETCLIENTID_CONFIRM4res
opsetclientid_confirm;
case OP_VERIFY: VERIFY4res opverify;
case OP_WRITE: WRITE4res opwrite;
case OP_RELEASE_LOCKOWNER: RELEASE_LOCKOWNER4res
oprelease_lockowner;
};
struct COMPOUND4args {
utf8string tag;
uint32_t minorversion;
nfs_argop4 argarray<>;
};
struct COMPOUND4res {
nfsstat4 status;
utf8string tag;
nfs_resop4 resarray<>;
};
/*
* Remote file service routines
*/
program NFS4_PROGRAM {
version NFS_V4 {
void
NFSPROC4_NULL(void) = 0;
COMPOUND4res
NFSPROC4_COMPOUND(COMPOUND4args) = 1;
} = 4;
} = 100003;
/*
* NFS4 Callback Procedure Definitions and Program
Expires: December 2002 [Page 235]
Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol July 2002
*/
/*
* CB_GETATTR: Get Current Attributes
*/
struct CB_GETATTR4args {
nfs_fh4 fh;
bitmap4 attr_request;
};
struct CB_GETATTR4resok {
fattr4 obj_attributes;
};
union CB_GETATTR4res switch (nfsstat4 status) {
case NFS4_OK:
CB_GETATTR4resok resok4;
default:
void;
};
/*
* CB_RECALL: Recall an Open Delegation
*/
struct CB_RECALL4args {
stateid4 stateid;
bool truncate;
nfs_fh4 fh;
};
struct CB_RECALL4res {
nfsstat4 status;
};
/*
* Various definitions for CB_COMPOUND
*/
enum nfs_cb_opnum4 {
OP_CB_GETATTR = 3,
OP_CB_RECALL = 4
};
union nfs_cb_argop4 switch (unsigned argop) {
case OP_CB_GETATTR: CB_GETATTR4args opcbgetattr;
case OP_CB_RECALL: CB_RECALL4args opcbrecall;
};
union nfs_cb_resop4 switch (unsigned resop){
case OP_CB_GETATTR: CB_GETATTR4res opcbgetattr;
case OP_CB_RECALL: CB_RECALL4res opcbrecall;
};
Expires: December 2002 [Page 236]
Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol July 2002
struct CB_COMPOUND4args {
utf8string tag;
uint32_t minorversion;
uint32_t callback_ident;
nfs_cb_argop4 argarray<>;
};
struct CB_COMPOUND4res {
nfsstat4 status;
utf8string tag;
nfs_cb_resop4 resarray<>;
};
/*
* Program number is in the transient range since the client
* will assign the exact transient program number and provide
* that to the server via the SETCLIENTID operation.
*/
program NFS4_CALLBACK {
version NFS_CB {
void
CB_NULL(void) = 0;
CB_COMPOUND4res
CB_COMPOUND(CB_COMPOUND4args) = 1;
} = 1;
} = 0x40000000;
Expires: December 2002 [Page 237]
Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol July 2002
19. Bibliography
[Floyd]
S. Floyd, V. Jacobson, "The Synchronization of Periodic Routing
Messages," IEEE/ACM Transactions on Networking, 2(2), pp. 122-136,
April 1994.
[Gray]
C. Gray, D. Cheriton, "Leases: An Efficient Fault-Tolerant Mechanism
for Distributed File Cache Consistency," Proceedings of the Twelfth
Symposium on Operating Systems Principles, p. 202-210, December 1989.
[ISO10646]
"ISO/IEC 10646-1:1993. International Standard -- Information
technology -- Universal Multiple-Octet Coded Character Set (UCS) --
Part 1: Architecture and Basic Multilingual Plane."
[Juszczak]
Juszczak, Chet, "Improving the Performance and Correctness of an NFS
Server," USENIX Conference Proceedings, USENIX Association, Berkeley,
CA, June 1990, pages 53-63. Describes reply cache implementation
that avoids work in the server by handling duplicate requests. More
important, though listed as a side-effect, the reply cache aids in
the avoidance of destructive non-idempotent operation re-application
-- improving correctness.
[Kazar]
Kazar, Michael Leon, "Synchronization and Caching Issues in the
Andrew File System," USENIX Conference Proceedings, USENIX
Association, Berkeley, CA, Dallas Winter 1988, pages 27-36. A
description of the cache consistency scheme in AFS. Contrasted with
other distributed file systems.
[Macklem]
Macklem, Rick, "Lessons Learned Tuning the 4.3BSD Reno Implementation
of the NFS Protocol," Winter USENIX Conference Proceedings, USENIX
Association, Berkeley, CA, January 1991. Describes performance work
in tuning the 4.3BSD Reno NFS implementation. Describes performance
improvement (reduced CPU loading) through elimination of data copies.
[Mogul]
Mogul, Jeffrey C., "A Recovery Protocol for Spritely NFS," USENIX
File System Workshop Proceedings, Ann Arbor, MI, USENIX Association,
Berkeley, CA, May 1992. Second paper on Spritely NFS proposes a
lease-based scheme for recovering state of consistency protocol.
Expires: December 2002 [Page 238]
Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol July 2002
[Nowicki]
Nowicki, Bill, "Transport Issues in the Network File System," ACM
SIGCOMM newsletter Computer Communication Review, April 1989. A
brief description of the basis for the dynamic retransmission work.
[Pawlowski]
Pawlowski, Brian, Ron Hixon, Mark Stein, Joseph Tumminaro, "Network
Computing in the UNIX and IBM Mainframe Environment," Uniforum `89
Conf. Proc., (1989) Description of an NFS server implementation for
IBM's MVS operating system.
[RFC1094]
Sun Microsystems, Inc., "NFS: Network File System Protocol
Specification", RFC1094, March 1989.
http://www.ietf.org/rfc/rfc1094.txt
[RFC1345]
Simonsen, K., "Character Mnemonics & Character Sets", RFC1345,
Rationel Almen Planlaegning, June 1992.
http://www.ietf.org/rfc/rfc1345.txt
[RFC1700]
Reynolds, J., Postel, J., "Assigned Numbers", RFC1700, ISI, October
1994
http://www.ietf.org/rfc/rfc1700.txt
[RFC1813]
Callaghan, B., Pawlowski, B., Staubach, P., "NFS Version 3 Protocol
Specification", RFC1813, Sun Microsystems, Inc., June 1995.
http://www.ietf.org/rfc/rfc1813.txt
[RFC1831]
Srinivasan, R., "RPC: Remote Procedure Call Protocol Specification
Version 2", RFC1831, Sun Microsystems, Inc., August 1995.
http://www.ietf.org/rfc/rfc1831.txt
[RFC1832]
Srinivasan, R., "XDR: External Data Representation Standard",
RFC1832, Sun Microsystems, Inc., August 1995.
Expires: December 2002 [Page 239]
Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol July 2002
http://www.ietf.org/rfc/rfc1832.txt
[RFC1833]
Srinivasan, R., "Binding Protocols for ONC RPC Version 2", RFC1833,
Sun Microsystems, Inc., August 1995.
http://www.ietf.org/rfc/rfc1833.txt
[RFC2025]
Adams, C., "The Simple Public-Key GSS-API Mechanism (SPKM)", RFC2025,
Bell-Northern Research, October 1996.
http://www.ietf.org/rfc/rfc2026.txt
[RFC2054]
Callaghan, B., "WebNFS Client Specification", RFC2054, Sun
Microsystems, Inc., October 1996
http://www.ietf.org/rfc/rfc2054.txt
[RFC2055]
Callaghan, B., "WebNFS Server Specification", RFC2055, Sun
Microsystems, Inc., October 1996
http://www.ietf.org/rfc/rfc2055.txt
[RFC2078]
Linn, J., "Generic Security Service Application Program Interface,
Version 2", RFC2078, OpenVision Technologies, January 1997.
http://www.ietf.org/rfc/rfc2078.txt
[RFC2152]
Goldsmith, D., "UTF-7 A Mail-Safe Transformation Format of Unicode",
RFC2152, Apple Computer, Inc., May 1997
http://www.ietf.org/rfc/rfc2152.txt
[RFC2203]
Eisler, M., Chiu, A., Ling, L., "RPCSEC_GSS Protocol Specification",
RFC2203, Sun Microsystems, Inc., August 1995.
http://www.ietf.org/rfc/rfc2203.txt
Expires: December 2002 [Page 240]
Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol July 2002
[RFC2277]
Alvestrand, H., "IETF Policy on Character Sets and Languages",
RFC2277, UNINETT, January 1998.
http://www.ietf.org/rfc/rfc2277.txt
[RFC2279]
Yergeau, F., "UTF-8, a transformation format of ISO 10646", RFC2279,
Alis Technologies, January 1998.
http://www.ietf.org/rfc/rfc2279.txt
[RFC2623]
Eisler, M., "NFS Version 2 and Version 3 Security Issues and the NFS
Protocol's Use of RPCSEC_GSS and Kerberos V5", RFC2623, Sun
Microsystems, June 1999
http://www.ietf.org/rfc/rfc2623.txt
[RFC2624]
Shepler, S., "NFS Version 4 Design Considerations", RFC2624, Sun
Microsystems, June 1999
http://www.ietf.org/rfc/rfc2624.txt
[RFC2847]
Eisler, M., "LIPKEY - A Low Infrastructure Public Key Mechanism Using
SPKM", RFC2847, Sun Microsystems, June 2000
http://www.ietf.org/internet-drafts/draft-ietf-cat-lipkey-03.txt
[Sandberg]
Sandberg, R., D. Goldberg, S. Kleiman, D. Walsh, B. Lyon, "Design
and Implementation of the Sun Network Filesystem," USENIX Conference
Proceedings, USENIX Association, Berkeley, CA, Summer 1985. The
basic paper describing the SunOS implementation of the NFS version 2
protocol, and discusses the goals, protocol specification and trade-
offs.
[Srinivasan]
Srinivasan, V., Jeffrey C. Mogul, "Spritely NFS: Implementation and
Performance of Cache Consistency Protocols", WRL Research Report
89/5, Digital Equipment Corporation Western Research Laboratory, 100
Hamilton Ave., Palo Alto, CA, 94301, May 1989. This paper analyzes
the effect of applying a Sprite-like consistency protocol applied to
standard NFS. The issues of recovery in a stateful environment are
Expires: December 2002 [Page 241]
Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol July 2002
covered in [Mogul].
[Unicode1]
The Unicode Consortium, "The Unicode Standard, Version 3.0",
Addison-Wesley Developers Press, Reading, MA, 2000. ISBN 0-201-
61633-5.
More information available at: http://www.unicode.org/
[Unicode2]
"Unsupported Scripts" Unicode, Inc., The Unicode Consortium, P.O. Box
700519, San Jose, CA 95710-0519 USA, September 1999
http://www.unicode.org/unicode/standard/unsupported.html
[XNFS]
The Open Group, Protocols for Interworking: XNFS, Version 3W, The
Open Group, 1010 El Camino Real Suite 380, Menlo Park, CA 94025, ISBN
1-85912-184-5, February 1998.
HTML version available: http://www.opengroup.org
Expires: December 2002 [Page 242]
Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol July 2002
20. Authors
20.1. Editor's Address
Spencer Shepler
Sun Microsystems, Inc.
7808 Moonflower Drive
Austin, Texas 78750
Phone: +1 512-349-9376
E-mail: spencer.shepler@sun.com
20.2. Authors' Addresses
Carl Beame
Hummingbird Ltd.
E-mail: beame@bws.com
Brent Callaghan
Sun Microsystems, Inc.
901 San Antonio Road
Palo Alto, CA 94303
Phone: +1 650-786-5067
E-mail: brent.callaghan@sun.com
Mike Eisler
5565 Wilson Road
Colorado Springs, CO 80919
Phone: +1 719-599-9026
E-mail: mike@eisler.com
David Noveck
Network Appliance
375 Totten Pond Road
Waltham, MA 02451
Phone: +1 781-895-4949
E-mail: dnoveck@netapp.com
David Robinson
Sun Microsystems, Inc.
901 San Antonio Road
Palo Alto, CA 94303
Expires: December 2002 [Page 243]
Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol July 2002
Phone: +1 650-786-5088
E-mail: david.robinson@sun.com
Robert Thurlow
Sun Microsystems, Inc.
901 San Antonio Road
Palo Alto, CA 94303
Phone: +1 650-786-5096
E-mail: robert.thurlow@sun.com
20.3. Acknowledgements
The author thanks and acknowledges:
Neil Brown for his extensive review and comments of various drafts.
Expires: December 2002 [Page 244]
Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol July 2002
21. Full Copyright Statement
"Copyright (C) The Internet Society (2000-2002). All Rights
Reserved.
This document and translations of it may be copied and furnished to
others, and derivative works that comment on or otherwise explain it
or assist in its implementation may be prepared, copied, published
and distributed, in whole or in part, without restriction of any
kind, provided that the above copyright notice and this paragraph are
included on all such copies and derivative works. However, this
document itself may not be modified in any way, such as by removing
the copyright notice or references to the Internet Society or other
Internet organizations, except as needed for the purpose of
developing Internet standards in which case the procedures for
copyrights defined in the Internet Standards process must be
followed, or as required to translate it into languages other than
English.
The limited permissions granted above are perpetual and will not be
revoked by the Internet Society or its successors or assigns.
This document and the information contained herein is provided on an
"AS IS" basis and THE INTERNET SOCIETY AND THE INTERNET ENGINEERING
TASK FORCE DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING
BUT NOT LIMITED TO ANY WARRANTY THAT THE USE OF THE INFORMATION
HEREIN WILL NOT INFRINGE ANY RIGHTS OR ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE."
Expires: December 2002 [Page 245]
Html markup produced by rfcmarkup 1.129d, available from
https://tools.ietf.org/tools/rfcmarkup/